1910012381 T2600G CLI
2018-03-27
: Tp-Link 1910012381 T2600G Cli 1910012381_T2600G_CLI 20180327 201803 2018
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 626
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
CLI Reference Guide T2600G Series Switches T2600G-18TS (TL-SG3216) / T2600G-28TS (TL-SG3424) T2600G-52TS (TL-SG3452) / T2600G-28MPS (TL-SG3424P) 1910012381 REV2.2.2 March 2018 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2018 TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. https://www.tp-link.com I CONTENTS Preface ............................................................................................................................ 1 Chapter 1 Using the CLI ................................................................................................... 7 1.1 Accessing the CLI ..................................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.1 Logon by a console port...................................................................................................... 7 1.1.3 Logon by SSH........................................................................................................................ 13 1.1.2 Logon by Telnet...................................................................................................................... 9 1.2 CLI Command Modes ............................................................................................................................ 21 1.3 Privilege Restrictions ............................................................................................................................. 24 1.4 Conventions.............................................................................................................................................. 24 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 Chapter 2 Format Conventions ........................................................................................................... 24 Special Characters .............................................................................................................. 24 Parameter Format ................................................................................................................ 25 User Interface .............................................................................................. 26 2.1 enable ............................................................................................................................................... 26 2.3 enable password........................................................................................................................... 27 2.5 configure.......................................................................................................................................... 30 2.2 2.4 service password-encryption .................................................................................................. 26 enable secret ................................................................................................................................. 28 2.6 exit...................................................................................................................................................... 30 2.8 clipaging........................................................................................................................................... 31 2.10 history clear .................................................................................................................................... 33 2.7 2.9 Chapter 3 end ..................................................................................................................................................... 31 history ............................................................................................................................................... 32 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands ................................................................ 34 3.1 vlan..................................................................................................................................................... 34 3.3 name.................................................................................................................................................. 35 3.5 switchport access vlan ............................................................................................................... 37 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.8 interface vlan .................................................................................................................................. 35 switchport mode ........................................................................................................................... 36 switchport trunk allowed vlan ................................................................................................... 38 switchport trunk allowed vlan all ............................................................................................. 39 switchport general allowed vlan .............................................................................................. 39 II 3.9 switchport pvid .............................................................................................................................. 40 3.10 show vlan summary...................................................................................................................... 41 3.12 show vlan ......................................................................................................................................... 42 3.11 3.13 Chapter 4 show vlan brief ............................................................................................................................... 42 show interface switchport ......................................................................................................... 43 MAC-based VLAN Commands ................................................................. 44 4.1 mac-vlan mac-address ............................................................................................................... 44 4.3 show mac-vlan ............................................................................................................................... 46 4.2 4.4 Chapter 5 mac-vlan .......................................................................................................................................... 45 show mac-vlan interface ............................................................................................................ 46 Protocol-based VLAN Commands ......................................................... 48 5.1 protocol-vlan template (For T2600G-18TS only) .............................................................. 48 5.3 protocol-vlan vlan ......................................................................................................................... 50 5.2 5.4 5.5 5.6 Chapter 6 protocol-vlan template (For other switches) ....................................................................... 49 protocol-vlan group ..................................................................................................................... 51 show protocol-vlan template.................................................................................................... 52 show protocol-vlan vlan ............................................................................................................. 52 VLAN-VPN Commands .............................................................................. 54 6.1 dot1q-tunnel................................................................................................................................... 54 6.3 dot1q-tunnel mapping ................................................................................................................ 55 6.2 6.4 6.5 6.6 dot1q-tunnel tpid .......................................................................................................................... 55 switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop......................................................................................... 56 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping .......................................................................................... 57 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode ................................................................................................ 58 6.7 show dot1q-tunnel ....................................................................................................................... 59 6.9 show dot1q-tunnel interface .................................................................................................... 60 6.8 Chapter 7 show dot1q-tunnel mapping..................................................................................................... 59 Private VLAN Commands ......................................................................... 61 7.1 private-vlan primary ..................................................................................................................... 61 7.3 private-vlan isolated .................................................................................................................... 62 7.2 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 private-vlan community .............................................................................................................. 62 private-vlan association ............................................................................................................. 63 switchport private-vlan ............................................................................................................... 64 switchport private-vlan host-association ............................................................................ 65 switchport private-vlan mapping ............................................................................................ 66 III 7.8 7.9 Chapter 8 8.1 show vlan private-vlan ................................................................................................................ 67 show vlan private-vlan interface.............................................................................................. 67 L2PT Commands ......................................................................................... 69 l2protocol-tunnel .......................................................................................................................... 69 8.2 l2protocol-tunnel type ................................................................................................................ 70 8.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface............................................................................................ 72 8.3 Chapter 9 show l2protocol-tunnel global ................................................................................................. 71 GVRP Commands ........................................................................................ 74 9.1 gvrp.................................................................................................................................................... 74 9.3 gvrp registration............................................................................................................................ 75 9.2 9.4 9.5 9.6 gvrp (interface)............................................................................................................................... 75 gvrp timer ........................................................................................................................................ 76 show gvrp interface ..................................................................................................................... 77 show gvrp global ........................................................................................................................... 78 Chapter 10 Voice VLAN Commands ............................................................................ 80 10.1 voice vlan ......................................................................................................................................... 80 10.3 voice vlan priority.......................................................................................................................... 81 10.2 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 voice vlan aging ............................................................................................................................. 81 voice vlan mac-address ............................................................................................................. 82 switchport voice vlan mode ...................................................................................................... 83 switchport voice vlan security ................................................................................................. 84 show voice vlan ............................................................................................................................. 85 show voice vlan oui ...................................................................................................................... 85 show voice vlan switchport ....................................................................................................... 86 Chapter 11 Etherchannel Commands ......................................................................... 87 11.1 channel-group ............................................................................................................................... 87 11.3 lacp system-priority ..................................................................................................................... 89 11.2 11.4 port-channel load-balance ........................................................................................................ 88 lacp port-priority ........................................................................................................................... 90 11.5 show etherchannel ....................................................................................................................... 91 11.7 show lacp ......................................................................................................................................... 92 11.6 11.8 show etherchannel load-balance ............................................................................................ 92 show lacp sys-id............................................................................................................................ 93 IV Chapter 12 User Management Commands ................................................................ 94 12.1 user name (password) ................................................................................................................. 94 12.3 service password-recovery ...................................................................................................... 97 12.5 user access-control mac-based ............................................................................................. 99 12.7 line ................................................................................................................................................... 101 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.14 12.15 12.16 12.17 user name (secret)........................................................................................................................ 95 user access-control ip-based .................................................................................................. 98 user access-control port-based .......................................................................................... 100 password ...................................................................................................................................... 102 login ................................................................................................................................................ 103 login local...................................................................................................................................... 104 media-type rj45 .......................................................................................................................... 105 telnet .............................................................................................................................................. 106 serial_port baud-rate ................................................................................................................ 106 show password-recovery ....................................................................................................... 107 show user account-list............................................................................................................. 108 show user configuration.......................................................................................................... 108 show telnet-status..................................................................................................................... 109 Chapter 13 HTTP and HTTPS Commands ................................................................ 110 13.1 13.2 13.3 ip http server ............................................................................................................................... 110 ip http max-users (For T2600G-18TS only) ...................................................................... 111 ip http max-users (For other switches) .............................................................................. 112 13.4 ip http session timeout ............................................................................................................ 113 13.6 ip http secure-protocol............................................................................................................ 114 13.8 ip http secure-max-users ....................................................................................................... 116 13.5 13.7 ip http secure-server ................................................................................................................ 113 ip http secure-ciphersuite ...................................................................................................... 115 13.9 ip http secure-session timeout ............................................................................................. 117 13.11 ip http secure-server download key ................................................................................... 118 13.10 13.12 13.13 ip http secure-server download certificate ...................................................................... 117 show ip http configuration ...................................................................................................... 119 show ip http secure-server .................................................................................................... 120 Chapter 14 ARP Commands ......................................................................................... 121 14.1 arp ................................................................................................................................................... 121 14.3 arp timeout ................................................................................................................................... 122 14.2 clear arp-cache .......................................................................................................................... 122 V 14.4 show arp........................................................................................................................................ 123 14.6 show ip arp summary................................................................................................................ 124 14.5 show ip arp (interface) .............................................................................................................. 124 Chapter 15 Binding Table Commands ....................................................................... 126 15.1 ip source binding ....................................................................................................................... 126 15.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan .............................................................................................................. 128 15.2 15.4 15.5 ip dhcp snooping ....................................................................................................................... 127 ip dhcp snooping information option.................................................................................. 129 ip dhcp snooping information strategy .............................................................................. 130 15.6 ip dhcp snooping information format ................................................................................. 131 15.8 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id............................................................................. 132 15.7 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id........................................................................... 133 15.9 ip dhcp snooping trust ............................................................................................................. 134 15.11 ip dhcp snooping limit rate ..................................................................................................... 136 15.10 15.12 15.13 15.14 15.15 15.16 15.17 ip dhcp snooping mac-verify ................................................................................................. 135 ip dhcp snooping decline rate ............................................................................................... 136 ip dhcp snooping max-entries .............................................................................................. 137 show ip source binding ............................................................................................................ 138 show ip dhcp snooping ............................................................................................................ 139 show ip dhcp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 139 show ip dhcp snooping information interface ................................................................. 140 Chapter 16 IPv6 Binding Table Commands.............................................................. 142 16.1 ipv6 source binding................................................................................................................... 142 16.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan ......................................................................................................... 144 16.2 16.4 16.5 ipv6 dhcp snooping .................................................................................................................. 143 ipv6 dhcp snooping trust ........................................................................................................ 145 ipv6 nd snooping ....................................................................................................................... 146 16.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan .............................................................................................................. 146 16.8 show ipv6 source binding ....................................................................................................... 148 16.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface .................................................................................... 149 16.7 16.9 16.11 16.12 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries............................................................................................... 147 show ipv6 dhcp snooping ....................................................................................................... 149 show ipv6 nd snooping ............................................................................................................ 150 show ipv6 nd snooping interface ......................................................................................... 151 VI Chapter 17 IP Verify Source Commands .................................................................. 152 17.1 ip verify source ........................................................................................................................... 152 17.3 show ip verify source interface ............................................................................................. 153 17.2 show ip verify source................................................................................................................ 153 Chapter 18 IPv6 Verify Source Commands ............................................................. 155 18.1 ipv6 verify source ...................................................................................................................... 155 18.3 show ipv6 verify source interface ........................................................................................ 156 18.2 show ipv6 verify source ........................................................................................................... 156 Chapter 19 ND Detection Commands ....................................................................... 158 19.1 ipv6 nd detection ....................................................................................................................... 158 19.3 ipv6 nd detection trust............................................................................................................. 159 19.2 19.4 19.5 ipv6 nd detection vlan .............................................................................................................. 158 show ipv6 nd detection ........................................................................................................... 160 show ipv6 nd detection interface......................................................................................... 160 Chapter 20 ARP Inspection Commands .................................................................... 162 20.1 ip arp inspection(global) .......................................................................................................... 162 20.3 ip arp inspection(interface)..................................................................................................... 163 20.5 ip arp inspection recover ........................................................................................................ 165 20.2 20.4 ip arp inspection trust .............................................................................................................. 162 ip arp inspection limit-rate ...................................................................................................... 164 20.6 show ip arp inspection ............................................................................................................. 166 20.8 show ip arp inspection statistics .......................................................................................... 167 20.7 20.9 show ip arp inspection interface .......................................................................................... 166 clear ip arp inspection statistics........................................................................................... 168 Chapter 21 DoS Defend Commands .......................................................................... 169 21.1 ip dos-prevent ............................................................................................................................ 169 21.3 show ip dos-prevent ................................................................................................................. 171 21.2 ip dos-prevent type................................................................................................................... 170 Chapter 22 IEEE 802.1X Commands .......................................................................... 172 22.1 dot1x system-auth-control .................................................................................................... 172 22.3 dot1x auth-method ................................................................................................................... 173 22.5 dot1x vlan-assignment ............................................................................................................ 175 22.2 22.4 dot1x handshake ....................................................................................................................... 173 dot1x accounting ....................................................................................................................... 175 VII 22.6 dot1x guest-vlan(global).......................................................................................................... 176 22.8 dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout ....................................................................................... 178 22.7 22.9 22.10 22.11 22.12 22.13 22.14 22.15 22.16 dot1x quiet-period..................................................................................................................... 177 dot1x max-reauth-req .............................................................................................................. 179 dot1x .............................................................................................................................................. 180 dot1x guest-vlan(interface) .................................................................................................... 180 dot1x mab .................................................................................................................................... 181 dot1x port-control ..................................................................................................................... 182 dot1x port-method.................................................................................................................... 183 show dot1x global ..................................................................................................................... 184 show dot1x interface ................................................................................................................ 185 Chapter 23 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands ............................................................ 186 23.1 pppoe id-insertion(global)....................................................................................................... 186 23.2 pppoe circuit-id(interface) ...................................................................................................... 187 23.4 pppoe remote-id ........................................................................................................................ 188 23.3 23.5 23.6 pppoe circuit-id type ................................................................................................................ 187 show pppoe id-insertion global ............................................................................................ 189 show pppoe id-insertion interface....................................................................................... 190 Chapter 24 System Log Commands .......................................................................... 192 24.1 24.2 logging buffer .............................................................................................................................. 192 logging buffer level.................................................................................................................... 193 24.3 logging file flash ......................................................................................................................... 193 24.5 logging file flash level ............................................................................................................... 195 24.4 24.6 logging file flash frequency .................................................................................................... 194 logging host index ..................................................................................................................... 196 24.7 logging console .......................................................................................................................... 197 24.9 logging monitor .......................................................................................................................... 198 24.8 24.10 24.11 24.12 24.13 24.14 24.15 logging console level................................................................................................................ 197 logging monitor level ................................................................................................................ 199 clear logging ................................................................................................................................ 200 show logging local-config....................................................................................................... 201 show logging loghost ............................................................................................................... 201 show logging buffer .................................................................................................................. 202 show logging flash..................................................................................................................... 203 VIII Chapter 25 SSH Commands ......................................................................................... 204 25.1 ip ssh server ................................................................................................................................ 204 25.3 ip ssh algorithm .......................................................................................................................... 205 25.5 ip ssh max-client ........................................................................................................................ 207 25.7 remove public-key..................................................................................................................... 208 25.2 25.4 25.6 25.8 ip ssh version .............................................................................................................................. 204 ip ssh timeout .............................................................................................................................. 206 ip ssh download.......................................................................................................................... 207 show ip ssh................................................................................................................................... 209 Chapter 26 MAC Address Commands ....................................................................... 210 26.1 mac address-table static ........................................................................................................ 210 26.2 mac address-table aging-time .............................................................................................. 211 26.4 mac address-table notification ............................................................................................. 213 26.3 mac address-table filtering .................................................................................................... 212 26.5 mac address-table max-mac-count ................................................................................... 214 26.7 mac address-table security ................................................................................................... 217 26.6 26.8 mac address-table notification (interface)........................................................................ 215 show mac address-table......................................................................................................... 218 26.9 clear mac address-table ......................................................................................................... 218 26.11 show mac address-table max-mac-count ........................................................................ 220 26.10 26.12 26.13 26.14 26.15 26.16 26.17 show mac address-table aging-time .................................................................................. 219 show mac address-table interface ...................................................................................... 220 show mac address-table count ............................................................................................ 221 show mac address-table address ....................................................................................... 222 show mac address-table vlan................................................................................................ 223 show mac address-table notification ................................................................................. 223 show mac address-table security........................................................................................ 224 Chapter 27 System Configuration Commands ....................................................... 225 27.1 system-time manual ................................................................................................................. 225 27.3 system-time dst predefined .................................................................................................. 228 27.2 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7 27.8 system-time ntp ......................................................................................................................... 225 system-time dst date ............................................................................................................... 229 system-time dst recurring ...................................................................................................... 230 hostname...................................................................................................................................... 231 location.......................................................................................................................................... 232 contact-info ................................................................................................................................. 233 IX 27.9 ip address ..................................................................................................................................... 234 27.11 reset ............................................................................................................................................... 236 27.10 27.12 27.13 27.14 27.15 27.16 27.17 27.18 27.19 27.20 27.21 27.22 ip address-alloc .......................................................................................................................... 235 reboot ............................................................................................................................................ 236 reboot-schedule ........................................................................................................................ 237 copy running-config startup-config.................................................................................... 238 copy startup-config tftp .......................................................................................................... 239 copy tftp startup-config .......................................................................................................... 240 boot application ......................................................................................................................... 241 remove backup-image ............................................................................................................. 241 firmware upgrade....................................................................................................................... 242 boot autoinstall start................................................................................................................. 243 boot autoinstall persistent-mode ........................................................................................ 244 boot autoinstall auto-save ...................................................................................................... 245 27.23 boot autoinstall auto-reboot.................................................................................................. 245 27.25 show boot autoinstall ............................................................................................................... 247 27.24 27.26 27.27 27.28 27.29 27.30 27.31 27.32 27.33 boot autoinstall retry-count ................................................................................................... 246 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config ....................................................................... 247 ping ................................................................................................................................................. 248 tracert ............................................................................................................................................ 249 show system-info ...................................................................................................................... 250 show system-info interface ................................................................................................... 251 show image-info......................................................................................................................... 252 show boot ..................................................................................................................................... 252 show running-config................................................................................................................. 253 27.34 show running-config | ............................................................................................................... 253 27.36 show system-time ..................................................................................................................... 255 27.35 27.37 27.38 27.39 27.40 27.41 27.42 show startup-config ................................................................................................................. 254 show system-time dst.............................................................................................................. 255 show system-time ntp ............................................................................................................. 256 show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet........................................................ 257 show cable-diagnostics careful interface ......................................................................... 257 show cpu-utilization .................................................................................................................. 258 show memory-utilization ......................................................................................................... 259 Chapter 28 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands ............................................ 260 28.1 28.2 ipv6 enable ................................................................................................................................... 260 ipv6 address autoconfig.......................................................................................................... 261 X 28.3 ipv6 address link-local ............................................................................................................. 261 28.5 ipv6 address ra ........................................................................................................................... 263 28.4 28.6 28.7 28.8 ipv6 address dhcp ..................................................................................................................... 262 ipv6 address eui-64 .................................................................................................................. 264 ipv6 address ................................................................................................................................ 265 show ipv6 interface ................................................................................................................... 265 Chapter 29 Ethernet Configuration Commands ..................................................... 267 29.1 interface gigabitEthernet ........................................................................................................ 267 29.3 description ................................................................................................................................... 269 29.2 29.4 29.5 29.6 interface range gigabitEthernet............................................................................................ 268 shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... 269 flow-control ................................................................................................................................. 270 duplex ............................................................................................................................................ 271 29.7 jumbo ............................................................................................................................................. 272 29.9 speed ............................................................................................................................................. 273 29.8 29.10 29.11 29.12 29.13 29.14 29.15 29.16 29.17 29.18 29.19 jumbo-size .................................................................................................................................... 272 downspeed enable .................................................................................................................... 274 storm-control pps ..................................................................................................................... 275 storm-control .............................................................................................................................. 276 bandwidth ..................................................................................................................................... 277 clear counters ............................................................................................................................. 278 show interface status ............................................................................................................... 278 show interface counters ......................................................................................................... 279 show interface configuration................................................................................................. 280 show storm-control .................................................................................................................. 281 show bandwidth ......................................................................................................................... 281 Chapter 30 QoS Commands......................................................................................... 283 30.1 30.2 qos (For T2600G-18TS only) ................................................................................................. 283 qos (For T2600G-52TS only) ................................................................................................. 284 30.3 qos port-priority ......................................................................................................................... 285 30.5 qos cos .......................................................................................................................................... 287 30.4 30.6 30.7 30.8 30.9 qos trust mode ........................................................................................................................... 286 qos dscp ....................................................................................................................................... 287 qos queue cos-map .................................................................................................................. 288 qos cos-map ............................................................................................................................... 290 qos dot1p-remap ....................................................................................................................... 291 XI 30.10 30.11 qos queue dscp-map (For T2600G-18TS only)............................................................... 292 qos queue dscp-map (For T2600G-52TS only)............................................................... 293 30.12 qos dscp-map ............................................................................................................................. 294 30.14 qos queue mode ........................................................................................................................ 296 30.13 30.15 30.16 30.17 30.18 30.19 30.20 30.21 30.22 30.23 30.24 30.25 qos dscp-remap ......................................................................................................................... 295 qos queue weight ...................................................................................................................... 298 show qos interface .................................................................................................................... 299 show qos cos-map .................................................................................................................... 300 show qos dot1p-remap interface ........................................................................................ 301 show qos dscp-map ................................................................................................................. 301 show qos dscp-map interface .............................................................................................. 302 show qos dscp-remap interface .......................................................................................... 303 show qos port-priority interface........................................................................................... 304 show qos trust-mode interface ............................................................................................ 304 show qos queue mode............................................................................................................. 305 show qos status ......................................................................................................................... 306 Chapter 31 Port Mirror Commands ............................................................................ 307 31.1 monitor session destination interface................................................................................ 307 31.3 show monitor session .............................................................................................................. 309 31.2 monitor session source interface ........................................................................................ 308 Chapter 32 Port Isolation Commands ....................................................................... 311 32.1 32.2 port isolation................................................................................................................................ 311 show port isolation interface ................................................................................................. 312 Chapter 33 Loopback Detection Commands .......................................................... 314 33.1 loopback-detection (global) ................................................................................................... 314 33.3 loopback-detection recovery-time ..................................................................................... 315 33.2 33.4 loopback-detection interval................................................................................................... 314 loopback-detection (interface) ............................................................................................. 316 33.5 loopback-detection config process-mode ...................................................................... 317 33.7 loopback-detection recover .................................................................................................. 319 33.6 33.8 33.9 loopback-detection config recovery-mode..................................................................... 318 show loopback-detection global.......................................................................................... 319 show loopback-detection interface .................................................................................... 320 Chapter 34 DDM Commands ....................................................................................... 322 34.1 ddm state enable ....................................................................................................................... 322 XII 34.2 ddm shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 323 34.4 ddm voltage_threshold............................................................................................................ 325 34.3 34.5 34.6 34.7 34.8 34.9 ddm temperature_threshold.................................................................................................. 324 ddm bias_current_threshold ................................................................................................. 326 ddm tx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................ 327 ddm rx_power_threshold ........................................................................................................ 328 show ddm configuration.......................................................................................................... 329 show ddm status ........................................................................................................................ 330 Chapter 35 ACL Commands ......................................................................................... 332 35.1 time-range .................................................................................................................................... 332 35.3 periodic ......................................................................................................................................... 334 35.2 absolute ........................................................................................................................................ 333 35.4 holiday ........................................................................................................................................... 335 35.6 access-list create ...................................................................................................................... 336 35.5 35.7 35.8 35.9 35.10 35.11 35.12 35.13 35.14 35.15 35.16 holiday (global) ............................................................................................................................ 335 mac access-list .......................................................................................................................... 337 access-list standard ................................................................................................................. 338 access-list extended ................................................................................................................ 339 access-list combined ............................................................................................................... 341 access-list ipv6 .......................................................................................................................... 343 rule .................................................................................................................................................. 345 access-list policy name ........................................................................................................... 347 access-list policy action.......................................................................................................... 347 redirect interface ....................................................................................................................... 348 s-condition ................................................................................................................................... 349 35.17 s-mirror.......................................................................................................................................... 350 35.19 access-list bind acl (interface) .............................................................................................. 351 35.18 35.20 qos-remark .................................................................................................................................. 350 access-list bind acl (vlan) ........................................................................................................ 352 35.21 access-list bind (interface) ..................................................................................................... 353 35.23 access-list packet-content config ...................................................................................... 355 35.22 access-list packet-content profile ...................................................................................... 354 35.24 access-list bind (vlan) ............................................................................................................... 356 35.26 show access-list status ........................................................................................................... 358 35.25 35.27 35.28 show access-list ........................................................................................................................ 357 show access-list policy ........................................................................................................... 358 show access-list bind............................................................................................................... 359 XIII Chapter 36 MSTP Commands ...................................................................................... 360 36.1 debug spanning-tree ................................................................................................................ 360 36.3 spanning-tree (interface) ........................................................................................................ 362 36.2 36.4 36.5 spanning-tree (global) .............................................................................................................. 361 spanning-tree common-config............................................................................................. 362 spanning-tree mode ................................................................................................................. 364 36.6 spanning-tree mst configuration ......................................................................................... 365 36.8 name............................................................................................................................................... 367 36.10 spanning-tree mst instance ................................................................................................... 368 36.7 36.9 instance......................................................................................................................................... 366 revision .......................................................................................................................................... 367 36.11 spanning-tree mst ..................................................................................................................... 369 36.13 spanning-tree timer .................................................................................................................. 371 36.12 36.14 36.15 spanning-tree priority .............................................................................................................. 370 spanning-tree hold-count....................................................................................................... 372 spanning-tree max-hops......................................................................................................... 373 36.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter ......................................................................................................... 373 36.18 spanning-tree guard loop ....................................................................................................... 375 36.20 spanning-tree guard tc ............................................................................................................ 377 36.17 36.19 spanning-tree bpduguard....................................................................................................... 374 spanning-tree guard root........................................................................................................ 376 36.21 spanning-tree mcheck............................................................................................................. 377 36.23 show spanning-tree bridge .................................................................................................... 379 36.22 36.24 36.25 36.26 show spanning-tree active ..................................................................................................... 378 show spanning-tree interface ............................................................................................... 379 show spanning-tree interface-security ............................................................................. 380 show spanning-tree mst ......................................................................................................... 381 Chapter 37 Ethernet OAM Commands ...................................................................... 383 37.1 ethernet-oam .............................................................................................................................. 383 37.3 ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period ....................................................................... 384 37.2 37.4 37.5 37.6 37.7 37.8 ethernet-oam mode.................................................................................................................. 384 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame ........................................................................................ 386 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period .......................................................................... 387 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds...................................................................... 388 ethernet-oam remote-failure................................................................................................. 389 ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote- loopback................................... 390 XIV 37.9 ethernet-oam remote-loopback .......................................................................................... 391 37.11 clear ethernet-oam event-log ............................................................................................... 393 37.10 37.12 37.13 37.14 37.15 clear ethernet-oam statistics ................................................................................................ 392 show ethernet-oam configuration ....................................................................................... 393 show ethernet-oam event-log .............................................................................................. 394 show ethernet-oam statistics ............................................................................................... 395 show ethernet-oam status ..................................................................................................... 396 Chapter 38 DLDP Commands ...................................................................................... 397 38.1 dldp (global) ................................................................................................................................. 397 38.3 dldp shut-mode .......................................................................................................................... 398 38.2 38.4 dldp interval ................................................................................................................................. 397 dldp reset (global) ...................................................................................................................... 399 38.5 dldp (interface) ............................................................................................................................ 399 38.7 show dldp ..................................................................................................................................... 401 38.6 38.8 dldp reset (interface) ................................................................................................................ 400 show dldp interface................................................................................................................... 401 Chapter 39 IGMP Snooping Commands.................................................................... 403 39.1 ip igmp snooping (global) ........................................................................................................ 403 39.3 ip igmp snooping rtime ............................................................................................................ 404 39.2 ip igmp snooping (interface) .................................................................................................. 404 39.4 ip igmp snooping mtime .......................................................................................................... 405 39.6 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave ..................................................................................... 407 39.5 39.7 ip igmp snooping report-suppression................................................................................ 406 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown ......................................................................................... 407 39.8 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval.................................................................... 408 39.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config ................................................................................................ 410 39.9 39.11 39.12 39.13 39.14 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count ..................................................................... 409 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) ................................................. 411 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config..................................................................................... 412 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) ...................................... 414 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) ............................................. 415 39.15 ip igmp snooping querier vlan ............................................................................................... 416 39.17 ip igmp snooping max-groups .............................................................................................. 418 39.16 39.18 39.19 ip igmp snooping querier vlan (general query) ................................................................ 416 ip igmp snooping authentication .......................................................................................... 419 ip igmp snooping accounting ................................................................................................ 420 XV 39.20 ip igmp profile ............................................................................................................................. 421 39.22 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 422 39.21 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 421 39.23 range .............................................................................................................................................. 423 39.25 clear ip igmp snooping statistics ......................................................................................... 424 39.24 39.26 39.27 39.28 39.29 39.30 39.31 39.32 ip igmp filter ................................................................................................................................. 423 show ip igmp snooping ............................................................................................................ 425 show ip igmp snooping interface ......................................................................................... 425 show ip igmp snooping vlan ................................................................................................... 426 show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan ....................................................................................... 427 show ip igmp snooping groups ............................................................................................. 428 show ip igmp snooping querier ............................................................................................. 429 show ip igmp profile .................................................................................................................. 430 Chapter 40 MLD Snooping Commands ..................................................................... 431 40.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global) ...................................................................................................... 431 40.3 ipv6 mld snooping rtime .......................................................................................................... 432 40.5 ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression ............................................................................. 433 40.2 40.4 40.6 ipv6 mld snooping (interface) ................................................................................................ 431 ipv6 mld snooping mtime ........................................................................................................ 433 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave ................................................................................... 434 40.7 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown ....................................................................................... 435 40.9 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count ................................................................... 436 40.11 ip mld snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) .................................................... 439 40.8 40.10 40.12 40.13 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval ................................................................. 435 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config .............................................................................................. 437 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config .................................................................................. 440 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden).................................... 441 40.14 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) ........................................... 442 40.16 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan (general query) .............................................................. 444 40.15 40.17 40.18 40.19 40.20 40.21 40.22 40.23 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan ............................................................................................. 443 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups ............................................................................................ 445 ipv6 mld profile ........................................................................................................................... 446 deny ................................................................................................................................................ 447 permit ............................................................................................................................................. 447 range .............................................................................................................................................. 448 ipv6 mld filter ............................................................................................................................... 449 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics ....................................................................................... 450 XVI 40.24 show ipv6 mld snooping.......................................................................................................... 450 40.26 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan................................................................................................. 452 40.25 40.27 40.28 40.29 40.30 show ipv6 mld snooping interface ....................................................................................... 451 show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan ..................................................................................... 452 show ipv6 mld snooping groups .......................................................................................... 453 show ipv6 mld snooping querier .......................................................................................... 454 show ipv6 mld profile................................................................................................................ 455 Chapter 41 SNMP Commands ..................................................................................... 456 41.1 snmp-server ................................................................................................................................ 456 41.2 snmp-server view ...................................................................................................................... 456 41.4 snmp-server user ...................................................................................................................... 459 41.3 41.5 41.6 snmp-server group ................................................................................................................... 457 snmp-server community ......................................................................................................... 461 snmp-server host ...................................................................................................................... 462 41.7 snmp-server engineID ............................................................................................................. 464 41.9 snmp-server traps link-status ............................................................................................... 466 41.11 snmp-server traps ddm ........................................................................................................... 468 41.8 41.10 41.12 41.13 snmp-server traps snmp......................................................................................................... 465 snmp-server traps ..................................................................................................................... 467 snmp-server traps vlan............................................................................................................ 470 snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop .......................................................................... 471 41.14 rmon history ................................................................................................................................ 471 41.16 rmon alarm ................................................................................................................................... 474 41.15 41.17 41.18 41.19 41.20 41.21 41.22 41.23 41.24 41.25 41.26 41.27 41.28 rmon event ................................................................................................................................... 473 rmon statistics ............................................................................................................................ 476 show snmp-server..................................................................................................................... 477 show snmp-server view........................................................................................................... 477 show snmp-server group........................................................................................................ 478 show snmp-server user ........................................................................................................... 479 show snmp-server community ............................................................................................. 479 show snmp-server host........................................................................................................... 480 show snmp-server engineID .................................................................................................. 480 show rmon history ..................................................................................................................... 481 show rmon event ....................................................................................................................... 482 show rmon alarm........................................................................................................................ 482 show rmon statistics ................................................................................................................ 483 XVII Chapter 42 LLDP Commands....................................................................................... 485 42.1 lldp................................................................................................................................................... 485 42.3 lldp hold-multiplier ..................................................................................................................... 486 42.2 42.4 42.5 42.6 42.7 42.8 42.9 42.10 42.11 42.12 42.13 lldp forward_message.............................................................................................................. 485 lldp timer ....................................................................................................................................... 487 lldp receive ................................................................................................................................... 488 lldp transmit ................................................................................................................................. 489 lldp snmp-trap............................................................................................................................. 490 lldp tlv-select ............................................................................................................................... 490 lldp management address ...................................................................................................... 491 lldp med-fast-count .................................................................................................................. 492 lldp med-status........................................................................................................................... 493 lldp med-tlv-select .................................................................................................................... 494 lldp med-location ....................................................................................................................... 495 42.14 show lldp ....................................................................................................................................... 496 42.16 show lldp local-information interface ................................................................................. 497 42.15 42.17 42.18 show lldp interface .................................................................................................................... 496 show lldp neighbor-information interface......................................................................... 498 show lldp traffic interface ....................................................................................................... 498 Chapter 43 sFlow Commands ...................................................................................... 500 43.1 sflow address .............................................................................................................................. 500 43.2 sflow enable ................................................................................................................................. 501 43.4 sflow sampler .............................................................................................................................. 503 43.3 sflow collector collector-ID .................................................................................................... 501 43.5 show sflow global ...................................................................................................................... 504 43.7 show sflow sampler .................................................................................................................. 505 43.6 show sflow collector ................................................................................................................. 504 Chapter 44 Static Routes Commands ....................................................................... 506 44.1 interface vlan ............................................................................................................................... 506 44.3 switchport .................................................................................................................................... 507 44.2 44.4 interface loopback .................................................................................................................... 506 interface range port-channel................................................................................................. 508 44.5 description ................................................................................................................................... 509 44.7 interface port-channel ............................................................................................................. 510 44.6 44.8 shutdown ...................................................................................................................................... 509 ip route .......................................................................................................................................... 511 XVIII 44.9 ipv6 routing .................................................................................................................................. 512 44.11 show interface vlan ................................................................................................................... 513 44.10 44.12 44.13 44.14 44.15 44.16 44.17 44.18 44.19 ipv6 route...................................................................................................................................... 513 show ip interface ........................................................................................................................ 514 show ip interface brief.............................................................................................................. 515 show ip route ............................................................................................................................... 515 show ip route specify ............................................................................................................... 516 show ip route summary ........................................................................................................... 517 show ipv6 interface ................................................................................................................... 518 show ipv6 route .......................................................................................................................... 518 show ipv6 route summary ...................................................................................................... 519 Chapter 45 SDM Template Commands ..................................................................... 520 45.1 45.2 sdm prefer .................................................................................................................................... 520 show sdm prefer ........................................................................................................................ 521 Chapter 46 AAA Commands ........................................................................................ 522 46.1 aaa enable .................................................................................................................................... 522 46.3 show tacacs-server .................................................................................................................. 524 46.2 tacacas-server host.................................................................................................................. 523 46.4 radius-server host ..................................................................................................................... 525 46.6 aaa group ...................................................................................................................................... 527 46.5 46.7 show radius-server ................................................................................................................... 527 server ............................................................................................................................................. 528 46.8 show aaa group .......................................................................................................................... 529 46.10 aaa authentication enable....................................................................................................... 531 46.9 46.11 46.12 46.13 46.14 46.15 46.16 46.17 46.18 46.19 46.20 46.21 aaa authentication login .......................................................................................................... 529 aaa authentication dot1x default.......................................................................................... 532 aaa accounting dot1x default ................................................................................................ 533 show aaa authentication ......................................................................................................... 533 show aaa accounting................................................................................................................ 534 line console .................................................................................................................................. 535 login authentication (console) ............................................................................................... 535 enable authentication (console) ........................................................................................... 536 line telnet ...................................................................................................................................... 537 login authentication (telnet).................................................................................................... 538 line ssh ........................................................................................................................................... 538 login authentication (ssh) ........................................................................................................ 539 XIX 46.22 enable authentication (telnet) ................................................................................................ 540 46.24 ip http login authentication..................................................................................................... 541 46.23 46.25 46.26 enable authentication (ssh) .................................................................................................... 541 ip http enable authentication ................................................................................................. 542 show aaa global .......................................................................................................................... 543 Chapter 47 DHCP Server Commands ........................................................................ 544 47.1 service dhcp server .................................................................................................................. 544 47.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id ............................................................... 545 47.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip.................................................................... 544 47.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address........................................................................................... 546 47.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout ................................................................................................... 548 47.5 47.7 47.8 ip dhcp server pool ................................................................................................................... 547 ip dhcp server ping packets................................................................................................... 548 network ......................................................................................................................................... 549 47.9 lease ............................................................................................................................................... 550 47.11 address client-identifier .......................................................................................................... 551 47.10 47.12 47.13 47.14 47.15 47.16 47.17 address hardware-address .................................................................................................... 550 default-gateway ......................................................................................................................... 552 dns-server .................................................................................................................................... 553 netbios-name-server ............................................................................................................... 554 netbios-node-type .................................................................................................................... 555 next-server................................................................................................................................... 555 domain-name .............................................................................................................................. 556 47.18 bootfile .......................................................................................................................................... 557 47.20 show ip dhcp server statistics............................................................................................... 558 47.22 show ip dhcp server pool ........................................................................................................ 559 47.19 47.21 47.23 47.24 47.25 47.26 47.27 show ip dhcp server status .................................................................................................... 558 show ip dhcp server extend-option .................................................................................... 559 show ip dhcp server excluded-address ............................................................................ 560 show ip dhcp server manual-binding .................................................................................. 560 show ip dhcp server binding .................................................................................................. 561 clear ip dhcp server statistics ............................................................................................... 561 clear ip dhcp server binding ................................................................................................... 562 Chapter 48 DHCP Server Filter Commands ............................................................. 563 48.1 48.2 ip dhcp filter (global).................................................................................................................. 563 ip dhcp filter (interface) ............................................................................................................ 563 XX 48.3 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry ......................................................................................... 564 48.4 show ip dhcp filter ..................................................................................................................... 565 48.6 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry.............................................................................. 566 48.5 show ip dhcp filter interface................................................................................................... 566 Chapter 49 DHCP Relay Commands .......................................................................... 568 49.1 service dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 568 49.3 ip helper-address....................................................................................................................... 569 49.2 ip dhcp relay enable .................................................................................................................. 568 49.4 ip dhcp relay information ........................................................................................................ 570 49.6 ip dhcp relay information format .......................................................................................... 572 49.5 49.7 49.8 49.9 49.10 49.11 49.12 49.13 ip dhcp relay information policy ........................................................................................... 571 ip dhcp relay information custom ........................................................................................ 573 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id...................................................................................... 573 ip dhcp relay information remote-id.................................................................................... 574 ip dhcp relay default-interface .............................................................................................. 575 ip dhcp relay vlan ....................................................................................................................... 575 show ip dhcp relay ..................................................................................................................... 576 show ip dhcp relay interface .................................................................................................. 577 Chapter 50 DHCP L2 Relay Commands .................................................................... 578 50.1 ip dhcp l2relay ............................................................................................................................. 578 50.3 ip dhcp l2relay information option ....................................................................................... 579 50.2 50.4 50.5 50.6 ip dhcp l2relay vlan.................................................................................................................... 578 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy ................................................................................... 580 ip dhcp l2relay information format....................................................................................... 581 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id .................................................................................. 582 50.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id ................................................................................ 583 50.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface .............................................................................................. 584 50.8 show ip dhcp l2relay ................................................................................................................. 583 Chapter 51 NetBIOS Filter Commands ...................................................................... 586 51.1 51.2 netbios filter................................................................................................................................. 586 show netbios filter ..................................................................................................................... 587 Chapter 52 PoE Commands ......................................................................................... 588 52.1 power inline consumption (global) ....................................................................................... 588 52.3 power profile ............................................................................................................................... 589 52.2 power inline disconnect-method ......................................................................................... 589 XXI 52.4 power time-range ...................................................................................................................... 591 52.6 absolute ........................................................................................................................................ 593 52.5 52.7 52.8 52.9 52.10 52.11 52.12 52.13 52.14 52.15 52.16 52.17 52.18 52.19 power holiday .............................................................................................................................. 592 periodic ......................................................................................................................................... 594 holiday ........................................................................................................................................... 595 power inline consumption (interface) ................................................................................. 595 power inline priority................................................................................................................... 596 power inline supply.................................................................................................................... 597 power inline profile .................................................................................................................... 598 power inline time-range ........................................................................................................... 599 show power inline ...................................................................................................................... 600 show power inline configuration interface ........................................................................ 600 show power inline information interface ........................................................................... 601 show power profile .................................................................................................................... 601 show power holiday .................................................................................................................. 602 show power time-range........................................................................................................... 603 XXII Preface This Guide is intended for network administrator to provide referenced information about CLI (Command Line Interface). The device mentioned in this Guide stands for T2600G-18TS/ T2600G-28TS/ T2600G-52TS/ T2600G-28MPS JetStream Gigabit L2 Managed Switch without any explanation. The commands in this guilde apply to these models if not specially noted, and T2600G-28TS is taken as an example model in the example commands. Some models featured in this guide may be unavailable in your country or region. For local sales information, visit https://www.tp-link.com. Overview of this Guide Chapter 1: Using the CLI Provide information about how to use the CLI, CLI Command Modes, Security Levels and some Conventions. Chapter 2: User Interface Provide information about the commands used to switch between five CLI Command Modes. Chapter 3: IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. Chapter 4: MAC-based VLAN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring MAC-based VLAN. Chapter 5: Protocol VLAN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring Protocol VLAN. Chapter 6: VLAN-VPN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function. Chapter 7: Private VLAN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring Private VLAN. 1 Chapter 8: L2PT Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring L2PT (Layer 2 Portocol Tunneling). Chapter 9: GVRP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol). Chapter 10: Voice VLAN Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring Voice VLAN. Chapter 11: Etherchannel Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring LAG (Link Aggregation Group) and LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol). Chapter 12: User Management Commands Provide information about the commands used for user management. Chapter 13: HTTP and HTTPS Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the HTTP and HTTPS logon. Chapter 14: ARP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) functions. Chapter 15: Binding Table Commands Provide information about the commands used for binding the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together. Chapter 16: IPv6 Binding Table Commands Provide information about the commands used for binding the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together. 2 Chapter 17: IP Verify Source Commands Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IP Source by filtering the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Chapter 18: IPv6 Verify Source Commands Provide information about the commands used for guarding the IPv6 Source by filtering the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Chapter 19: ND Detection Commands Provide information about the commands used for congifuring ND detection. Chapter 20: ARP Inspection Commands Provide information about the commands used for protecting the switch from the ARP cheating or ARP Attack. Chapter 21: DoS Defend Command Provide information about the commands used for DoS defend and detecting the DoS attack. Chapter 22: IEEE 802.1X Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring IEEE 802.1X function. Chapter 23 PPPoE ID Insertion Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring PPPoE ID Insertion. Chapter 24: System Log Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring system log. Chapter 25: SSH Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring and managing SSH (Security Shell). Chapter 26: MAC Address Commands Provide information about the commands used for Address configuration. 3 Chapter 27: System Configuration Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System information and System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and commands used for cable test. Chapter 28: IPv6 Address Configuration Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the System IPv6 addresses. Chapter 29: Ethernet Configuration Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Bandwidth Control, Negotiation Mode, and Storm Control for enthernet ports. Chapter 30: QoS Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the QoS function. Chapter 31: Port Mirror Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Port Mirror function. Chapter 32: Port Isolation Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring Port Isolation function. Chapter 33: Loopback Detection Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Loopback Detection function. Chapter 34: DDM Commands Provide information about the commands used for DDM (Digtal Diagnostic Monitoring) function. Chapter 35: ACL Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the ACL (Access Control List). Chapter 36: MSTP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol). 4 Chapter 37 Ethernet OAM Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Ethernet OAM (Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) function. Chapter 38: DLDP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol). Chapter 39: IGMP Snooping Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping). Chapter 40: MLD Snooping Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping). Chapter 41: SNMP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions. Chapter 42: LLDP Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring LLDP function. Chapter 43: sFlow Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Sampled Flow function. Chapter 44: Static Routes Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the Static Route function. Chapter 45: SDM Template Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the SDM templates. Chapter 46: AAA Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring AAA (authentication, authorization and accounting). 5 Chapter 47: DHCP Server Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Server function. Chapter 48: DHCP Server Filter Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Server Filter function. Chapter 49: DHCP Relay Commands Provide information about the commands used for configuring the DHCP Relay function. Chapter 50: DHCP L2 Relay Commands (For T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS only) Provide information about the commands used for configuring DHCP L2 Relay. Chapter 51: NetBIOS Filter Commands (For T2600G-28MPS only) Provide information about the commands used for configuring NetBIOS Filter function. Chapter 52: PoE Commands (For T2600G-28MPS only) Provide information about the commands used for configuring PoE function. 6 Chapter 1 Using the CLI 1.1 Accessing the CLI You can log on to the switch and access the CLI by the following three methods: 1. Log on to the switch by the console port on the switch. 2. Log on to the switch remotely by a Telnet connection through an Ethernet port. 3. Log on to the switch remotely by an SSH connection through an Ethernet port. 1.1.1 Logon by a console port Console Port The switch has two console ports: an RJ-45 console port and a Micro-USB console port. Console output is active on devices connected to both console ports, but console input is only active on one console port at a time. The Micro-USB connector takes precedence over the RJ-45 connector. When the switch detects a valid connection on the Micro-USB console port, input from the RJ-45 console port is immediately disabled, and input from the Micro-USB console port is enabled. Removing the Micro-USB connection immediately reenables input from the RJ-45 console connection. USB Console Driver If you are using the USB port on the MAC OS X or Linux OS for console connection, there is no need to run a USB driver. If you are using the switch’s Micro-USB console port with the USB port of a Windows PC, a driver for the USB port is required. The USB driver is provided on the resource CD. Follow the InstallSheild Wizard to accomplish the installation. The TP-Link USB Console Driver supports the following Windows operating systems: 32-bit Windows XP SP3 64-bit Windows XP 32-bit Windows Vista 64-bit Windows Vista 32-bit Windows 7 7 64-bit Windows 7 32-bit Windows 8 64-bit Windows 8 32-bit Windows 8.1 64-bit Windows 8.1 After the TP-Link USB Console Driver is installed, the PC’s USB port will act as RS-232 serial port when the PC’s USB port is connected to the switch’s Micro-USB console port. And the PC’s USB port will act as standard USB port when the PC’s USB port is unplugged from the switch. Logon Take the following steps to log on to the switch by the console port. 1. Connect the PCs or Terminals to the console port on the switch by the provided cable. 2. Start the terminal emulation program (such as the HyperTerminal) on the PC. 3. Specify the connection COM port in the terminal emulation program. If the Micro-USB Console port is used, you can view which port is assigned to the USB serial port in the following path: Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Device Manager -> Ports ->USB Serial Port. Figure 1-1 USB Serial Port Number 4. Configure the terminal emulation program or the terminal to use the following settings: Baud rate: 38400 bps Data bits: 8 8 5. Parity: none Stop bits: 1 Flow control: none The DOS prompt ”T2600G-28TS>” will appear after pressing the Enter button as shown in Figure 1-2. It indicates that you can use the CLI now. Figure 1-2 Log in the Switch 1.1.2 Logon by Telnet For Telnet connection, you should also configure the Telnet login mode and login authentication information through console connection. Telnet login has the following two modes. You can choose one according to your needs: Login local Mode: It requires username and password, which are both admin by default. Login Mode: It doesn’t require username and password, but a connection password is required. Before Telnet login, you are required to configure Telnet login mode and login authentication information through console connection. 9 Login Local Mode Firstly, configure the Telnet login mode as “login local” in the prompted DOS screen shown in Figure 1-3. Figure 1-3 Configure login local mode Now, you can logon by Telnet in login local mode. 1. Make sure the switch and the PC are in the same LAN. Click Start and type in cmd in the Search programs and files window and press the Enter button. Figure 1-4 Run Window 2. Type telnet 192.168.0.1 in the command prompt shown as Figure 1-5, and press the Enter button. 10 Figure 1-5 Connecting to the Switch 3. Type the default user name and password (both of them are admin), then press the Enter button so as to enter User EXEC Mode. Figure 1-6 Enter into the User EXEC Mode 4. Type enable command to enter Privileged EXEC Mode. Figure 1-7 Enter into the Priviledged EXEC Mode Now you can manage your switch with CLI commands through Telnet connection. 11 Login Mode Firstly configure the Telnet login mode as “login” and the connection password as 456 in the prompted DOS screen shown in Figure 1-8. Figure 1-8 Configure login mode Now, you can logon by Telnet in login mode: 1. Make sure the switch and the PC are in the same LAN. Click Start and type in cmd in the Search programs and files window and press the Enter button. Figure 1-9 Run Window 2. Type telnet 192.168.0.1 in the command prompt shown as Figure 1-10, and press the Enter button. 12 Figure 1-10 Connecting to the Switch 3. You are prompted to enter the connection password 456 you have set through Console port connection, and then you are in User EXEC Mode. Figure 1-11 Enter into the User EXEC Mode 4. Type enable command to enter Privileged EXEC Mode. Figure 1-12 Enter into the Privileged EXEC Mode Now you can manage your switch with CLI commands through Telnet connection. Note: You can refer to Chapter 11 User Management Commands for detailed commands information of the Telnet connection configuration. 1.1.3 Logon by SSH To log on by SSH, a Putty client software is recommended. There are two authentication modes to set up an SSH connection: Password Authentication Mode: It requires username and password, which are both admin by default. Key Authentication Mode: It requires a public key for the switch and a private key for the SSH client software. You can generate the public key and the private key through Putty Key Generator. 13 Note: Before SSH login, follow the steps shown in Figure 1-13 to enable the SSH function through Telnet connection. Figure 1-13 Enable SSH function 14 Password Authentication Mode 1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch into Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the Connection type. Figure 1-14 SSH Connection Config 2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name and password to log on the switch, and then enter enable to enter Privileged EXEC Mode, so you can continue to configure the switch. Figure 1-15 Log on the Switch 15 Key Authentication Mode 1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key. Figure 1-16 Generate SSH Key 1. 2. Note: The key length is in the range of 512 to 3072 bits. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key generation. 16 2. After the key is successfully generated, save the public key and private key to a TFTP server. Figure 1-17 Save the Generated Key 17 3. Log on to the switch by Telnet and download the public key file from the TFTP server to the switch, as the following figure shows: Figure 1-18 Download the Public Key 1. 2. Note: The key type should accord with the type of the key file. The SSH key downloading can not be interrupted. 18 4. After the public key is downloaded, log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP address for login. Figure 1-19 SSH Connection Config 19 5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open. Figure 1-20 Download the Private Key 6. After successful authentication, enter the login user name. If you log on to the switch without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded. Figure 1-21 Log on the Switch 20 1.2 CLI Command Modes The CLI is divided into different command modes: User EXEC Mode, Privileged EXEC Mode, Global Configuration Mode, Interface Configuration Mode and VLAN Configuration Mode. Interface Configuration Mode can also be divided into Interface Ethernet, Interface link-aggregation and some other modes, which is shown as the following diagram. The following table gives detailed information about the Accessing path, Prompt of each mode and how to exit the current mode and access the next mode. Mode Accessing Path User EXEC Primary mode once Mode the switch. it is connected with Prompt Logout or Access the next mode Use the exit command to T2600G-28TS> disconnect the switch. Use the enable command to access Privileged EXEC mode. Enter the disable or the exit Privileged EXEC Mode command to return to User Use the enable command to enter this mode from User T2600G-28TS# EXEC mode. EXEC mode. Enter configure command to access Global Configuration mode. Use the exit or the end command or press Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged EXEC mode. Global Configuration Mode Use the configure command to enter this mode from Use the interface T2600G-28TS(config)# gigabitEthernet port or interface range gigabitEthernet port-list Privileged EXEC command to access interface mode. Configuration mode. Use the vlan vlan-list to access VLAN Configuration mode. 21 Mode Accessing Path Prompt Logout or Access the next mode Layer 2 Interface: Use the interface gigabitEthernet Interface Configuration Mode port, interface port-channel T2600G-28TS (config-if)# port-channel-id or interface range gigabitEthernet or T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)# port-list command to Use the end command or press Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged EXEC mode. Enter the exit or the # command to return to Global Configuration mode. A port number must be specified in the interface command. enter this mode from Global Configuration mode. Layer 3 Interface: Use the no switchport command to enter Routed Port mode from Interface Configuration mode. Interface Configuration Mode Use the interface vlan vlan-id command to enter VLAN Interface mode from Global Configuration mode. Use the switchport command to switch to the Layer 2 interface mode. T2600G-28TS (config-if)# or Use the end command or press Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged EXEC mode. T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)# Enter the exit or the # command to return to Global Configuration mode. Use the interface loopback id command to enter Loopback Interface mode from Global Configuration mode. 22 Mode Accessing Path Configuration Mode 1. 2. command to enter this mode from mode Use the end command or press Use the vlan vlan-list VLAN Logout or Access the next Prompt Ctrl+Z to return to Privileged T2600G-28TS (config-vlan)# Global Configuration EXEC mode. Enter the exit command or the # command to return to Global mode. configuration mode. Note: The user is automatically in User EXEC Mode after the connection between the PC and the switch is established by a Telnet/SSH connection. Each command mode has its own set of specific commands. To configure some commands, you should access the corresponding command mode firstly. Global Configuration Mode: In this mode, global commands are provided, such as the Spanning Tree, Schedule Mode and so on. Interface Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can configure one or several ports, different ports corresponds to different commands a). Interface gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for an Ethernet port, such as Duplex-mode, flow control status. b). Interface range gigabitEthernet: Configure parameters for several Ethernet ports. c). Interface link-aggregation: Configure parameters for a link-aggregation, such as broadcast storm. d). Interface range link-aggregation: Configure parameters for multi-trunks. e). Interface vlan: Configure parameters for the vlan-port. VLAN Configuration Mode: In this mode, users can create a VLAN and add a specified port to the VLAN. 3. Some commands are global, that means they can be performed in all modes: show: Display all information of switch, for example: statistic information, port information, VLAN information. history: Display the commands history. 23 1.3 Privilege Restrictions This switch’s security is divided into four privilege levels: User level, Power User level, Operator level and Admin level. You can define username and password pairs, and assign a specific privilege level to each pair. Different privilege levels have access to specified commands, which is illustrated in the Privilege Requirement in each command. For details about how to configure usename and password pairs, refer to user name (password) and user name (secret). Users can enter Privileged EXEC mode from User EXEC mode by using the enable command. In default case, no password is needed. In Global Configuration Mode, you can configure password for Admin level by enable password command. Once password is configured, you are required to enter it to access Privileged EXEC mode. 1.4 Conventions 1.4.1 Format Conventions The following conventions are used in this Guide: Items in square brackets [ ] are optional Items in braces { } are required Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. For example: speed {10 | 100 | 1000 } Bold indicates an unalterable keyword. For example: show logging Normal Font indicates a constant (several options are enumerated and only one can be selected). For example: mode {dynamic | static | permanent} Italic Font indicates a variable (an actual value must be assigned). For example: bridge aging-time aging-time 1.4.2 Special Characters You should pay attentions to the description below if the variable is a character string: These six characters ” < > , \ & can not be input. 24 If a blank is contained in a character string, single or double quotation marks should be used, for example ’hello world’, ”hello world”, and the words in the quotation marks will be identified as a string. Otherwise, the words will be identified as several strings. 1.4.3 Parameter Format Some parameters must be entered in special formats which are shown as follows: MAC address must be enter in the format of xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. One or several values can be typed for a port-list or a vlan-list using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance,1/0/1,1/0/3-5,1/0/7 indicates choosing port 1/0/1,1/0/3,1/0/4,1/0/5,1/0/7. 25 Chapter 2 2.1 User Interface enable Description The enable command is used to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. Syntax enable Command Mode User EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example If you have set the password to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode: T2600G-28TS>enable Enter password: T2600G-28TS# 2.2 service password-encryption Description The service password-encryption command is used to encrypt the password when the password is defined or when the configuration is written, using the symmetric encryption algorithm. Encryption prevents the password from being readable in the configuration file. To disable the global encryption function, use no service password-encryption command. 26 Syntax service password-encryption no service password-encryption Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the global encryption function: T2600G-28TS(config)# service password-encryption 2.3 enable password Description The enable password command is used to set or change the password for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To remove the password, use no enable password command. This command uses the symmetric encryption. Syntax enable password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password } no enable password Parameter 0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. password —— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English letters (case sensitive), underlines ( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty. 27 and sixteen special characters 7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow. encrypted-password —— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form. Example Set the super password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#enable password 0 admin 2.4 enable secret Description The enable secret command is used to set a secret password, which is using an MD5 encryption algorithm, for users to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. To return to the default configuration, use no enable secret command. This command uses the MD5 encryption. Syntax enable secret { [ 0 ] password | 5 encrypted-password } no enable secret 28 Parameter 0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. password —— Super password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters ( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). By default, it is empty. The password in the configuration file will be displayed in the MD5 encrypted form. 5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow. encrypted-password —— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines If both the enable password and enable secret are defined, you must enter the password set in enable secret. Example Set the secret password as “admin” and unencrypted to access Privileged EXEC Mode from User EXEC Mode. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form. T2600G-28TS(config)#enable secret 0 admin 29 2.5 configure Description The configure command is used to access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode. Syntax configure Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Access Global Configuration Mode from Privileged EXEC Mode: T2600G-28TS# configure T2600G-28TS(config)# 2.6 exit Description The exit command is used to return to the previous Mode from the current Mode. Syntax exit Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 30 Example Return to Global Configuration Mode from Interface Configuration Mode, and then return to Privileged EXEC Mode: T2600G-28TS(config-if)# exit T2600G-28TS(config)#exit T2600G-28TS# 2.7 end Description The end command is used to return to Privileged EXEC Mode. Syntax end Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Return to Privileged EXEC Mode from Interface Configuration Mode: T2600G-28TS(config-if)#end T2600G-28TS# 2.8 clipaging Description The clipaging command is used to enable the pause function for the screen display. If you want to display all the related information of the switch at once when using the show command, use no clipaging command. 31 Syntax clipaging no clipaging Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Disable the pause function for the screen display: T2600G-28TS(config)#no clipaging 2.9 history Description The history command is used to show the latest 20 commands you entered in the current mode since the switch is powered. Syntax history Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Show the commands you have entered in the current mode: T2600G-28TS (config)# history 1 history 32 2.10 history clear Description The history clear command is used to clear the commands you have entered in the current mode, therefore these commands will not be shown next time you use the history command. Syntax history clear Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the commands you have entered in the current mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#history clear 33 Chapter 3 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Commands VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) technology is developed for the switch to divide the LAN into multiple logical LANs flexibly. Hosts in the same VLAN can communicate with each other, regardless of their physical locations. VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains. 3.1 vlan Description The vlan command is used to create IEEE 802.1Q VLAN and enter VLAN Configuration Mode. To delete the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, use no vlan command. Syntax vlan vlan-list no vlan vlan-list Parameter vlan-list —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create VLAN 2-10 and VLAN 100: T2600G-28TS(config)# vlan 2-10,100 Delete VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# no vlan 2 34 3.2 interface vlan Description The interface vlan command is used to create VLAN Interface and enter Interface VLAN Mode. To delete VLAN Interface, use no interface vlan command. Syntax interface vlan vlan-id no interface vlan vlan-id Parameter vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create VLAN Interface 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 3.3 name Description The name command is used to assign a description to a VLAN. To clear the description, use no name command. Syntax name descript no name 35 Parameter descript ——String to describe the VLAN, which contains 16 characters at most. Command Mode VLAN Configuration Mode(VLAN) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the name of VLAN 2 as “group1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# vlan 2 T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)# name group1 3.4 switchport mode Description The switchport mode command is used to configure the Link Types for the ports. Syntax switchport mode { access | trunk | general } Parameter access | trunk | general —— Link Types. There are three Link Types for the ports. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 36 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the Link Type of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as “trunk”: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport mode trunk 3.5 switchport access vlan Description The switchport access vlan command is used to add the desired Access port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the corresponding VLAN. Syntax switchport access vlan vlan-id no switchport access vlan Parameter vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 whose link type is “access” to VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 37 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport access vlan 2 3.6 switchport trunk allowed vlan Description The switchport trunk allowed vlan command is used to add the desired trunk port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. To remove a trunk port from the corresponding VLAN, use no switchport trunk allowed vlan command. Syntax switchport trunk allowed vlan { vlan-list } no switchport trunk allowed vlan { vlan-list } Parameter vlan-list —— VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the link type of port 2 as trunk and add it to VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport mode trunk T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport trunk allowed vlan 2 38 3.7 switchport trunk allowed vlan all Description The switchport trunk allowed vlan all command is used to add the desired trunk port to all the IEEE 802.1Q VLANs. To remove a trunk port from all the IEEE 802.1Q VLANs, use no switchport trunk allowed vlan all command. Syntax switchport trunk allowed vlan all no switchport trunk allowed vlan all Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the link type of port 2 as trunk and add it to all the VLANs: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport mode trunk T2600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan all 3.8 switchport general allowed vlan Description The switchport general allowed vlan command is used to add the desired General port to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN, or to remove a port from the corresponding VLAN. 39 Syntax switchport general allowed vlan vlan-list { tagged | untagged } no switchport general allowed vlan vlan-list Parameter vlan-list —— VLAN ID list, ranging from 2 to 4094, in the format of 2-3, 5. It is multi-optional. tagged | untagged —— egress-rule. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4 whose link type is “general” to VLAN 2 and its egress-rule as “tagged”: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport mode general T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport general allowed vlan 2 tagged 3.9 switchport pvid Description The switchport pvid command is used to configure the PVID for the switch ports. Syntax switchport pvid vlan-id 40 Parameter vlan-id —— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the PVID of port 1/0/2 as 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport pvid 2 3.10 show vlan summary Description The show vlan summary command is used to display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. Syntax show vlan summary Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the summarized information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)# show vlan summary 41 3.11 show vlan brief Description The show vlan brief command is used to display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. Syntax show vlan brief Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the brief information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)# show vlan brief 3.12 show vlan Description The show vlan command is used to display the information of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. Syntax show vlan [ id vlan-id ] Parameter vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. It is multi-optional. Using the show vlan command without parameter displays the detailed information of all VLANs. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 42 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of vlan 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# show vlan id 5 3.13 show interface switchport Description The show interface switchport command is used to display the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN configuration information of the specified port/port channel. Syntax show interface port-channel-id ] switchport [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel Parameter port —— The port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface switchport 43 Chapter 4 MAC-based VLAN Commands MAC VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify the VLANs based on MAC Address. A MAC address is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets coming from the MAC address will be tagged with this VLAN ID. 4.1 mac-vlan mac-address Description The mac-vlan mac-address command is used to create a MAC-based VLAN entry. To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, use the no mac-vlan mac-address command. Syntax mac-vlan mac-address mac-addr vlan vlan-id [description descript] no mac-vlan mac-address mac-addr Parameter mac-addr —— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. descript —— Give a description to the MAC address for identification, which contains 8 characters at most. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create VLAN 2 with the MAC address 00:11:11:01:01:12 and the name “TP”: 44 T2600G-28TS(config)#mac-vlan mac-address 00:11:11:01:01:12 vlan 2 description TP 4.2 mac-vlan Description The mac-vlan command is used to enable a port for the MAC-based VLAN feature. Only the port is enabled can the configured MAC-based VLAN take effect. To disable the MAC-based VLAN function, use no mac-vlan command. All the ports are disabled by default. Syntax mac-vlan no mac-vlan Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 for the MAC-based VLAN feature: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#mac-vlan 45 4.3 show mac-vlan Description The show mac-vlan command is used to display the information of the MAC-based VLAN entry. MAC address and VLAN ID can be used to filter the displayed information. Syntax show mac-vlan { all | mac-address mac-addr | vlan vlan-id } Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Parameter mac-addr —— MAC address, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. Example Display the information of all the MAC-based VLAN entry: T2600G-28TS(config)#show mac-vlan all 4.4 show mac-vlan interface Description The show mac-vlan interface command is used to display the port state of MAC-based VLAN. Syntax show mac-vlan interface 46 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the enable state of all the ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show mac-vlan interface 47 Chapter 5 Protocol-based VLAN Commands Protocol VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is the way to classify VLANs based on Protocols. A Protocol is relative to a single VLAN ID. The untagged packets and the priority-tagged packets matching the protocol template will be tagged with this VLAN ID. 5.1 protocol-vlan template (For T2600G-18TS only) Description The protocol-vlan template command is used to create Protocol-based VLAN template. To delete Protocol-based VLAN template, use no protocol-vlan template command. Syntax protocol-vlan template name protocol-name ether-type type no protocol-vlan template template-idx Parameter protocol-name —— Give a name for the Protocol-based VLAN Template , which contains 8 characters at most. ether-type type —— Specify the Ethernet type. It should be 4 hexadecimal numbers. template-idx —— The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can get the template corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan template command. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 48 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a Protocol-based VLAN template named “TP” whose Ethernet protocol type is 0x2024: T2600G-18TS(config)#protocol-vlan template name TP ether-type 2024 5.2 protocol-vlan template (For other switches) Description The protocol-vlan template command is used to create Protocol-based VLAN template. To delete Protocol-based VLAN template, use no protocol-vlan template command. Syntax protocol-vlan template name protocol-name frame { ether_2 ether-type type | snap ether-type type | llc dsap dsap_type ssap ssap_type } no protocol-vlan template template-idx Parameter protocol-name —— Give a name for the Protocol-based VLAN Template , which contains 8 characters at most. ether_2 ether-type type —— Specify the Ethernet type. snap ether-type type —— Specify the Ethernet type. llc dsap dsap_type ssap ssap_type —— Specify the DSAP type and the SSAP type. template-idx —— The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can get the template corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan template command. 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a Protocol-based VLAN template named “TP” whose Ethernet protocol type is 0x2024: T2600G-28TS(config)#protocol-vlan template name TP frame ether_2 ether-type 2024 5.3 protocol-vlan vlan Description The protocol-vlan vlan command is used to create a Protocol-based VLAN entry. To delete a Protocol-based VLAN entry, use no protocol-vlan vlan command. Syntax protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id template template-idx no protocol-vlan vlan group-idx Parameter vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 1-4094. template-idx ——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN Template. You can get the template corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan template command. group-idx ——The number of the Protocol-based VLAN entry. You can get the Protocol-based VLAN entry corresponding to the number by the show protocol-vlan vlan command. 50 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create Protocol-based VLAN 2 and bind it with Protocol-based VLAN Template 3: T2600G-28TS(config)#protocol-vlan vlan 2 template 3 5.4 protocol-vlan group Description The protocol-vlan command is used to add the port to a specified protocol group. To remove the port from this protocol group, use no protocol-vlan group command. Syntax protocol-vlan group index no protocol-vlan group index Parameter index —— Specify the protocol group ID. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 51 Example Add Gigabit Ethernet port 20 to protocol group 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#protocol-vlan group 1 5.5 show protocol-vlan template Description The show protocol-vlan template command is used to display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates. Syntax show protocol-vlan template Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of the Protocol-based VLAN templates: T2600G-28TS(config)#show protocol-vlan template 5.6 show protocol-vlan vlan Description The show protocol-vlan vlan command is used to display the information about Protocol-based VLAN entry. Syntax show protocol-vlan vlan 52 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display information of the Protocol-based VLAN entry: T2600G-28TS(config)#show protocol-vlan vlan 53 Chapter 6 VLAN-VPN Commands VLAN-VPN (Virtual Private Network) function, the implement of a simple and flexible Layer 2 VPN technology, allows the packets with VLAN tags of private networks to be encapsulated with VLAN tags of public networks at the network access terminal of the Internet Service Provider. And these packets will be transmitted with double-tag across the public networks. 6.1 dot1q-tunnel Description The dot1q-tunnel command is used to enable the VLAN-VPN function globally. To disable the VLAN-VPN function, use the no dot1q-tunnel command. Syntax dot1q-tunnel no dot1q-tunnel Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the VLAN-VPN function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1q-tunnel 54 6.2 dot1q-tunnel tpid Description The dot1q-tunnel tpid command is used to configure Global TPID of the VLAN-VPN. To restore to the default value, use the no dot1q-tunnel tpid command. Syntax dot1q-tunnel tpid tpid no dot1q-tunnel tpid Parameter tpid —— The value of Global TPID. It must be 4 Hex integers. By default, it is 8100. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Global TPID of the VLAN-VPN as 0x9100: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100 6.3 dot1q-tunnel mapping Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. Description The dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used to enable the VLAN Mapping feature globally. To disable this function, use the no dot1q-tunnel mapping command. By default, the VLAN Mapping feature is disabled. 55 Syntax dot1q-tunnel mapping no dot1q-tunnel mapping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the VLAN mapping feature globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1q-tunnel mapping 6.4 switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop Description The switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop command is used to enable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function for a specific port. To disable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function, use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop command. Syntax switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop no switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the VLAN-VPN missdrop function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3: 56 T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel missdrop 6.5 switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping Description The switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used add the VLAN Mapping entry on a specified port. To delete the VLAN Mapping entry on this port, use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping command. Syntax switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping c-vlan sp-vlan [descript] no switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping c-vlan Parameter c-vlan —— Customer VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. sp-vlan —— Service Provider VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. descript —— Give a description to the VLAN Mapping entry, which contains 15 characters at most. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a VLAN Mapping entry on the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 with the Customer VLAN as VLAN 2 and the Service Provider VLAN as VLAN 3: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mapping 2 3 57 6.6 switchport dot1q-tunnel mode Description The switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command is used to configure the VPN port’s mode. To close this VPN port, use the no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode command. By default, no port has been configured as the VPN port. The VPN port mode uni and nni cannot switch to each other directly, so close the VPN port and switch to the other mode if needed. Syntax switchport dot1q-tunnel mode { uni/nni } no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode Parameter uni ——The port connected to the clients. (Note: T2600G-18TS does’t support uni port setting.) nni ——The port connected to the ISP. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as the VPN UNI ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uni 58 6.7 show dot1q-tunnel Description The show dot1q-tunnel command is used to display the global configuration information of the VLAN VPN. Syntax show dot1q-tunnel Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration information of the VLAN VPN: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel 6.8 show dot1q-tunnel mapping Description The show dot1q-tunnel mapping command is used to display the information of VLAN Mapping entry. Syntax show dot1q-tunnel mapping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 59 Example Display the information of VLAN Mapping entry: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel mapping 6.9 show dot1q-tunnel interface Description The show dot1q-tunnel mapping interface command is used to display the VLAN VPN port type. Syntax show dot1q-tunnel interface Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the port type of all VLAN VPN ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1q-tunnel interface 60 Chapter 7 Private VLAN Commands Note: T2600G-18TS doesn't support Private VLAN feature. Private VLANs are configured specially for saving VLAN resource of uplink devices and decreasing broadcast. 7.1 private-vlan primary Description The private-vlan primary command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the primary VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the primary VLAN property pf the current VLAN, use no private-vlan primary command. Syntax private-vlan primary no private-vlan primary Command Mode VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the VLAN 3 as the primary VLAN of the private VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3 T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan primary 61 7.2 private-vlan community Description The private-vlan community command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the community VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the community VLAN property pf the current VLAN, use no private-vlan community command. Syntax private-vlan community no private-vlan community Command Mode VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the VLAN 4 as the community VLAN of the private VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 4 T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan community 7.3 private-vlan isolated Description The private-vlan isolated command is used to configure the designated VLAN as the isolated VLAN of the Private VLAN. To remove the isolated VLAN property pf the current VLAN, use no private-vlan isolated command. Syntax private-vlan isolated no private-vlan isolated 62 Command Mode VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the VLAN 3 as the isolated VLAN of the private VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3 T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan isolated 7.4 private-vlan association Description The private-vlan association command is used to associate primary VLAN with secondary VLAN. To exterminate the currently association, use no private-vlan association command. Syntax private-vlan association vlan_list no private-vlan association vlan_list Parameter vlan_list —— Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. Command Mode VLAN Configuration Mode (VLAN) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Associate primary VLAN 3 with community VLAN 4 as a private VLAN: 63 T2600G-28TS(config)#vlan 3 T2600G-28TS(config-vlan)#private-vlan association 4 7.5 switchport private-vlan Description The switchport private-vlan command is used to configure the private VLAN mode for the switchport. To invalid the configuration, use no switchport private-vlan command. Syntax switchport private-vlan { promiscuous | host } no switchport private-vlan Parameter promiscuous | host —— Configure the private VLAN mode for the switchport. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 3 as “host”: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host 64 7.6 switchport private-vlan host-association Description The switchport private-vlan host-association command is used to add host type port to private VLAN. To remove the port from Private VLAN, use no switchport private-vlan host-association command. Syntax switchport private-vlan host-association primary_vlan_id secondary_vlan_id vlantype no switchport private-vlan host-association Parameter primary-vlan-id —— Primary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. secondary-vlan-id —— Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. vlantype —— Specify the type of the secondary VLAN, either community or isolated. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure host type Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as a member of primary VLAN 3 and secondary VLAN 4, with the type of VLAN 4 as community: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3 4 community 65 7.7 switchport private-vlan mapping Description The switchport private-vlan mapping command is used to add promiscuous type port to private VLAN. To remove the port from Private VLAN, use no switchport private-vlan mapping command. Syntax switchport private-vlan mapping primary_vlan_id secondary_vlan_id no switchport private-vlan mapping Parameter primary-vlan-id —— Primary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. secondary-vlan-id —— Secondary VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure promiscuous type Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3 as a member of primary VLAN 3 and secondary VLAN 4: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 3 4 66 7.8 show vlan private-vlan Description The show vlan private-vlan command is used to display the Private VLAN configuration information of the switch. Syntax show vlan private-vlan Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration information of all Private VLAN: T2600G-28TS(config)#show vlan private-vlan 7.9 show vlan private-vlan interface Description The show vlan private-vlan interface command is used to display the Private VLAN configuration information of the specified port(s). Syntax show vlan private-vlan interface [gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. 67 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration information of all the Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show vlan private-vlan interface 68 Chapter 8 L2PT Commands L2PT (Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling) is a feature for service providers to transmit packets from different customers across their ISP networks and maintain Layer 2 protocol configurations of each customer. The supported Layer 2 protocols are STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol), CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol), VTP (VLAN Trunking Protocol), PAgP (Port Aggregation Protocol), UDLD (UniDirectional Link Detection) and PVST+(Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus). 8.1 l2protocol-tunnel Description The l2protocol-tunnel command is used to enable the layer 2 protocol tunneling (L2PT) function globally. To disable the L2PT function, use no l2protocol-tunnel command. Syntax l2protocol-tunnel no l2protocol-tunnel Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the L2PT function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# l2protocol-tunnel 69 8.2 l2protocol-tunnel type Description The l2protocol-tunnel type command is used to configure the L2PT function on a specified port. To disable the L2PT function on the specified port, use no l2protocol-tunnel command. Syntax l2protocol-tunnel type nni l2protocol-tunnel type uni { 01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | lacp | all } [ threshold threshold ] no l2protocol-tunnel Parameter nni —— Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the network. Specify the port’s type as NNI if it is connecting to the ISP network. uni —— Specify the port type according to its connecting device in the network. Specify the port’s type as UNI if it is connecting to the user’s local network. 01000ccccccc | 01000ccccccd | gvrp | stp | lacp | all —— Select the supported Layer 2 protocol type. Packets of the specified protocol will be encapsulated with their destination MAC address before they are sent to the ISP network. Packets will be decapsulated to restore their Layer 2 protocol and MAC address information before they are sent to the customer network. • 01000ccccccc: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CC is used as the destination MAC address of the CDP/VTP/PAgP/UDLD packets. • 01000ccccccd: Enable protocol tunneling for the packets with destination MAC address 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD. 01-00-0CC-CC-CC-CD is used as the destination MAC address of Cisco PVST+ BPDUs. • gvrp: Enable protocol tunneling for the GVRP packets. 70 • stp: Enable protocol tunneling for the STP packets. lacp: Enable protocol tunneling for the LACP packets. • all: All the above Layer 2 protocols are supported for tunneling. threshold ——Configure the threshold for packets-per-second accepted for encapsulation. Packets beyond the threshold will be dropped. It ranges from 0 to 1000. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure port 1/0/3 as a UNI port for STP packets with the threshold as 1000 packets/second: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel type uni stp threshold 1000 8.3 show l2protocol-tunnel global Description The show l2protocol-tunnel global command is used to display the global L2PT status. Syntax show l2protocol-tunnel global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 71 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global L2PT status: T2600G-28TS(config)# show l2protocol-tunnel global 8.4 show l2protocol-tunnel interface Description The show l2protocol-tunnel interface command is used to display the L2PT configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports. Syntax show l2protocol-tunnel interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the L2PT configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Display the L2PT configuration information of all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show l2protocol-tunnel interface 72 73 Chapter 9 GVRP Commands GVRP (GARP VLAN registration protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN. 9.1 gvrp Description The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function globally. To disable the GVRP function, use no gvrp command. Syntax gvrp no gvrp Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the GVRP function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#gvrp 74 9.2 gvrp (interface) Description The gvrp command is used to enable the GVRP function for the desired port. To disable it, use no gvrp command. The GVRP feature can only be enabled for the trunk-type ports. Syntax gvrp no gvrp Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the GVRP function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#gvrp 9.3 gvrp registration Description The gvrp registration command is used to configure the GVRP registration type for the desired port. To restore to the default value, use no gvrp registration command. Syntax gvrp registration { normal | fixed | forbidden } 75 no gvrp registration Parameter normal | fixed | forbidden —— Registration mode. By default, the registration mode is “normal”. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the GVRP registration mode as “fixed” for Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#gvrp registration fixed 9.4 gvrp timer Description The gvrp timer command is used to set a GVRP timer for the desired port. To restore to the default setting of a GARP timer, use no gvrp timer command. Syntax gvrp timer { leaveall | join | leave } value no gvrp timer [leaveall | join | leave] Parameter leaveall | join | leave —— They are the three timers: leave All, join and leave. Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send a LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP ports can 76 re-register all the attribute information. After that, the LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle. To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a GARP port sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message. Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute information if it does not receive a Join message again before the timer times out. value ——The value of the timer. The LeaveAll Timer ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds and the default value is 1000 centiseconds. The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds and the default value is 20 centiseconds. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000 centiseconds and the default value is 60 centiseconds. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the GARP leaveall timer of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/6 as 2000 centiseconds and restore the join timer of it to the default value: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/6 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#gvrp timer leaveall 2000 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#no gvrp timer join 9.5 show gvrp interface Description The show gvrp interface command is used to display the GVRP configuration information of a specified Ethernet port or of all Ethernet ports. 77 Syntax show gvrp interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the GVRP configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Display the GVRP configuration information of all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp interface 9.6 show gvrp global Description The show gvrp global command is used to display the global GVRP status. Syntax show gvrp global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 78 Example Display the global GVRP status: T2600G-28TS(config)#show gvrp global 79 Chapter 10 Voice VLAN Commands Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality. 10.1 voice vlan Description The voice vlan command is used to enable Voice VLAN function. To disable Voice VLAN function, use no voice vlan command. Syntax voice vlan vlan-id no voice vlan Parameter vlan-id —— Specify IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID, ranging from 2 to 4094. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Voice VLAN function for VLAN 10: T2600G-28TS(config)# voice vlan 10 80 10.2 voice vlan aging Description The voice vlan aging command is used to set the aging time for a voice VLAN. To restore to the default aging time for the Voice VLAN, use no voice vlan aging command. Syntax voice vlan aging time no voice vlan aging Parameter time —— Aging time (in minutes) to be set for the Voice VLAN. It ranges from 1 to 43200 minutes and the default value is 1440 minutes. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the aging time for the Voice VLAN as 1 minute: T2600G-28TS(config)# voice vlan aging 1 10.3 voice vlan priority Description The voice vlan priority command is used to configure the priority for the Voice VLAN. To restore to the default priority, use no voice vlan priority command. 81 Syntax voice vlan priority pri no voice vlan priority Parameter pri —— Priority, ranging from 0 to 7, and the default value is 6. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the priority of the Voice VLAN as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# voice vlan priority 5 10.4 voice vlan mac-address Description The voice vlan mac-address command is used to create Voice VLAN OUI. To delete the specified Voice VLAN OUI, use no voice vlan mac-address command. Syntax voice vlan mac-address mac-addr mask mask [ description descript ] no voice vlan mac-address mac-addr Parameter mac-addr —— The OUI address of the voice device, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. 82 mask —— The OUI address mask of the voice device, in the format of XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. descript ——Give a description to the OUI for identification which contains 16 characters at most. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a Voice VLAN OUI described as TP-Phone with the OUI address 00:11:11:11:11:11 and the mask address FF:FF:FF:00:00:00: T2600G-28TS(config)#voice vlan mac-address 00:11:11:11:11:11 mask FF:FF:FF:00:00:00 description TP-Phone 10.5 switchport voice vlan mode Description The switchport voice vlan mode command is used to configure the Voice VLAN mode for the Ethernet port. Syntax switchport voice vlan mode { manual | auto } Parameter manual | auto —— Port mode. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 83 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the port 1/0/3 to operate in the auto voice VLAN mode: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport voice vlan mode auto 10.6 switchport voice vlan security Description The switchport voice vlan security command is used to enable the Voice VLAN security feature. To disable the Voice VLAN security feature, use no switchport voice vlan security command. Syntax switchport voice vlan security no switchport voice vlan security Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable port 1/0/3 for the Voice VLAN security feature: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# switchport voice vlan security 84 10.7 show voice vlan Description The show voice vlan command is used to display the global configuration information of Voice VLAN. Syntax show voice vlan Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan 10.8 show voice vlan oui Description The show voice vlan oui command is used to display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI. Syntax show voice vlan oui Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 85 Example Display the configuration information of Voice VLAN OUI: T2600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan oui 10.9 show voice vlan switchport Description The show voice vlan switchport command is used to display the Voice VLAN configuration information of a specified port/port channel. Syntax show voice vlan switchport [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan switchport Display the Voice VLAN configuration information of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show voice vlan switchport gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 86 Chapter 11 Etherchannel Commands Etherchannel Commands are used to configure LAG and LACP function. LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data path, which can highly extend the bandwidth. The bandwidth of the LAG is the sum of bandwidth of its member port. LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic link aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch can dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly extend the bandwidth and flexibly balance the load. 11.1 channel-group Description The channel-group command is used to add a port to the EtherChannel Group and configure its mode. To delete the port from the EtherChannel Group, use no channel-group command. Syntax channel-group num mode { on | active | passive } no channel-group Parameter num —— The number of the EtherChannel Group, ranging from 1 to 14. on —— Enable the static LAG. active —— Enable the active LACP mode. passive —— Enable the passive LACP mode. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) 87 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add ports 2-4 to EtherChannel Group 1 and enable the static LAG: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)# channel-group 1 mode on 11.2 port-channel load-balance Description The port-channel load-balance command is used to configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG. To return to the default configurations, use no port-channel load-balance command. Syntax port-channel load-balance { src-mac | dst-mac | src-dst-mac | src-ip | dst-ip | src-dst-ip } no port-channel load-balance Parameter src-mac —— The source MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source MAC address of the packets. dst-mac —— The destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination MAC address of the packets. src-dst-mac —— The source and destination MAC address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and destination MAC addresses of the packets. The Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG is “src-dst-mac” by default. 88 src-ip —— The source IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source IP address of the packets. dst-ip —— The destination IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the destination IP address of the packets. src-dst-ip —— The source and destination IP address. When this option is selected, the Aggregate Arithmetic will be based on the source and destination IP addresses of the packets. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Aggregate Arithmetic for LAG as “src-dst-ip”: T2600G-28TS(config)# port-channel load-balance src-dst-ip 11.3 lacp system-priority Description The lacp system-priority command is used to configure the LACP system priority globally. To return to the default configurations, use no lacp system-priority command. Syntax lacp system-priority pri no lacp system-priority Parameter pri —— The system priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default. 89 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the LACP system priority as 1024 globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# lacp system-priority 1024 11.4 lacp port-priority Description The lacp port-priority command is used to configure the LACP port priority for specified ports. To return to the default configurations, use no lacp port-priority command. Syntax lacp port-priority pri no lacp port-priority Parameter pri —— The port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. It is 32768 by default. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the LACP port priority as 1024 for ports 1-3: 90 T2600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)# lacp port-priority 1024 Configure the LACP port priority as 2048 for port 4: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# lacp port-priority 2048 11.5 show etherchannel Description The show etherchannel command is used to display the EtherChannel information. Syntax show etherchannel [ channel-group-num ] { detail | summary } Parameter channel-group-num —— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to 14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all EtherChannel Groups. detail —— The detailed information of EtherChannel. summary —— The EtherChannel information in summary. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the detailed information of EtherChannel Group 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show etherchannel 1 detail 91 11.6 show etherchannel load-balance Description The show etherchannel load-balance command is used to display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG. Syntax show etherchannel load-balance Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the Aggregate Arithmetic of LAG: T2600G-28TS(config)# show etherchannel load-balance 11.7 show lacp Description The show lacp command is used to display the LACP information for a specified EtherChannel Group. Syntax show lacp [ channel-group-num ] { internal | neighbor } Parameter channel-group-num —— The EtherChannel Group number, ranging from 1 to 14. By default, it is empty, and will display the information of all LACP groups. internal —— The internal LACP information. neighbor —— The neighbor LACP information. 92 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the internal LACP information of EtherChannel Group 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show lacp 1 internal 11.8 show lacp sys-id Description The show lacp sys-id command is used to display the LACP system priority globally. Syntax show lacp sys-id Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the LACP system priority: T2600G-28TS(config)# show lacp sys-id 93 Chapter 12 User Management Commands User Manage Commands are used to manage the user’s logging information by Web, Telnet or SSH, so as to protect the settings of the switch from being randomly changed. 12.1 user name (password) Description The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed users’ information. To delete the existed users, use no user name command. This command uses the symmetric encryption. Syntax user name name [ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password } no user name name Parameter name ——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most, composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only. admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator” means that you can edit, modify and view most of the settings of different functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view some of the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is “admin” by default. For more details about privilege restrictions, refer to the Privilege Requirement part in each command. 0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. password —— Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English 94 letters (case ( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters 7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow. encrypted-password —— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form. Example Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is “admin” and unencrypted: T2600G-28TS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin password 0 admin 12.2 user name (secret) Description The user name command is used to add a new user or modify the existed users’ information. To delete the existed users, use no user name command. This command uses the MD5 encryption. 95 Syntax user name name [ privilege admin | operator | power_user | user ] secret { [ 0 ] password | 5 encrypted-password } no user name name Parameter name ——Type a name for users' login, which contains 16 characters at most, composed of digits, English letters and under dashes only. admin | operator | power_user | user —— Access level. “admin” means that you can edit, modify and view all the settings of different functions. “operator” means that you can edit, modify and view most of the the settings of different functions. “power-user” means that you can edit, modify and view some of the the settings of different functions. “user” means that you can only view some of the the settings of different functions without the right to edit or modify. It is “admin” by default. 0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. password ——Users’ login password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows digits, English letters (case sensitive), underlines and sixteen special characters ( !$%'()*,-./[]{|} ). The password will be saved to the configuration file using the MD5 encrypted algorithm. 5 —— Indicates an MD5 encrypted password with fixed length will follow. encrypted-password —— An MD5 encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 96 User Guidelines If both the user name (password) and user name (secret) are defined, only the latest configured password will take effect. Example Add and enable a new admin user named “tplink”, of which the password is “admin”. The password will be displayed in the encrypted form. T2600G-28TS(config)#user name tplink privilege admin secret 0 admin 12.3 service password-recovery Description The service password-recovery command is used to enable the password-recovery feature. To disable the password-recovery feature, use no service password-recovery command. With password-recovery enabled, you can connect to the switch’s concole port and delete all your previous set accounts. You can use the default username and password (which are both admin) to login the switch after its startup. For more details about password recovery procedure, refer to Appendix A in the User Guide. Syntax service password-recovery no service password-recovery Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the switch’s password recovery feature: 97 T2600G-28TS(config)# service password-recovery 12.4 user access-control ip-based Description The user access-control ip-based command is used to limit the IP-range of the users for login. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are allowed to login. To cancel the user access limit, use no user access-control command. Syntax user access-control ip-based { ip-addr ip-mask } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] no user access-control [ ip-based index id ] Parameter ip-addr —— The source IP address. Only the users within the IP-range you set here are allowed for login. 5 IP-based entries can be configured at most. ip-mask —— The subnet mask of the IP address. [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default. id —— Delete the specified IP-based entry. The index ranges from 1 to 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the access-control of the user whose IP address is 192.168.0.148: T2600G-28TS(config)# user 255.255.255.255 98 access-control ip-based 192.168.0.148 12.5 user access-control mac-based Description The user access-control mac-based command is used to limit the MAC address of the users for login. Only the user with this MAC address you set here is allowed to login. To cancel the user access limit, use no user access-control command. Syntax user access-control mac-based { mac-addr } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] no user access-control Parameter mac-addr —— The source MAC address. Only the user with this MAC address is allowed to login. [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure that only the user whose MAC address is 00:00:13:0A:00:01 is allowed to login: T2600G-28TS(config)# user access-control mac-based 00:00:13:0A:00:01 99 12.6 user access-control port-based Description The user access-control port-based command is used to limit the ports for login. Only the users connected to these ports you set here are allowed to login. To cancel the user access limit, use no user access-control command. Syntax user access-control port-based interface { gigabitEthernet port-list } [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] no user access-control Parameter port-list ——The list group of Ethernet ports, in the format of 1/0/1-4. You can appoint 5 ports at most. [ snmp ] [ telnet ] [ ssh ] [ http ] [ https ] [ ping ] [ all ] —— Specify the access interface. These interfaces are enabled by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure that only the users connected to ports 2-6 are allowed to login: T2600G-28TS(config)# user gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6 100 access-control port-based interface 12.7 line Description The line command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode and make related configurations for the desired user(s), including the login mode and password configurations. Syntax line { console linenum | vty startlinenum endlinenum | ssh | telnet } Parameter linenum —— The number of users allowed to login through console port. Its value is 0 in general, for the reason that console input is only active on one console port at a time. startlinenum ——The start serial number of the login user selected to configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the same manner. endlinenum —— The end serial number of the login user selected to configure the login mode and password, ranging from 0 to 15. 0 means the first login user number, 1 means the second, and the rest can be done on the same manner. ssh —— Configure the SSH terminal line. telnet —— Configure the Telnet terminal line. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enter the Console port configuration mode and configure the console port 0: 101 T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0 Enter the Virtual Terminal configuration mode so as to prepare further configurations such as password and login mode for virtual terminal 0 to 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#line vty 0 5 12.8 password Description The password command is used to configure the connection password. To clear the password, use no password command. Syntax password { [ 0 ] password | 7 encrypted-password } no password Parameter 0 —— Specify the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted password will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. password —— Connection password, a string from 1 to 31 alphanumeric characters or symbols. The password is case sensitive, allows spaces but ignores leading spaces, and cannot contain question marks. By default, it is empty. 7 —— Indicates a symmetric encrypted password with fixed length will follow. encrypted-password —— A symmetric encrypted password with fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. After the encrypted password is configured, you should use the corresponding unencrypted password if you re-enter this mode. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode 102 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines If the password you configured here is unencrypted and the global encryption function is enabled in service password-encryption, the password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form. Example Configure the connection password of Console port connection 0 as “tplink” and unencrypted: T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#password 0 tplink Configure the connection password of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as “tplink” and unencrypted: T2600G-28TS(config)#line vty 0 5 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#password 0 tplink 12.9 login Description The login command is used to configure the login mode of a switch which uses connection password to login. At this situation, a connection password must be set for virtual terminal connection. Syntax login Command Mode Line Configuration Mode 103 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the login of Console port connection 0 as login mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#login Configure the login of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as login mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#line vty 0 5 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#login 12.10 login local Description The login local command is used to configure the login mode of the switch which uses the user name and password to login. Syntax login local Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the login of virtual terminal connection 0-5 as login local mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#line vty 0 5 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#login local Configure the login of Console port connection 0 as login local mode: 104 T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)#login local 12.11 media-type rj45 Description The media-type rj45 command is used to configure the console media type as RJ-45 for input. The switch has two console ports available —— an RJ-45 console port and a micro-USB console port. Console input is active on only one console port at a time. By default, the micro-USB connector takes precedence over the RJ-45 connector, which means that, when both the RJ-45 console connection and micro-USB console connection are valid, input from the RJ-45 console is disabled, and input from the micro-USB console is enabled. To return to the default configuration, use no media-type rj45 command. Syntax media-type rj45 no media-type rj45 Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the RJ-45 console input: T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)# media-type rj45 Receive the micro-USB console input prior to the RJ-45 console input: T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0 105 T2600G-28TS(config-line)# no media-type rj45 12.12 telnet Description The telnet enable command is used to enable the Telnet function. To disable the Telnet function, use the telnet disable command. This function is enabled by default. Syntax telnet enable telnet disable Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Disable the Telnet function: T2600G-28TS(config)# telnet disable 12.13 serial_port baud-rate Description The serial_port baud-rate command is used to configure the communication baud rate on the console port. To return to the default baud rate, use no serial_port command. Syntax serial_port baud-rate { 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 } no serial_port 106 Parameter 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200 ——Specify the communication baud rate on the console port. The default baul rate is 38400 bps. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the communication baud rate on the console port to the default value: T2600G-28TS(config)# no serial_port 12.14 show password-recovery Description The show password-recovery command is used to display the status of the password-recovery feature. Syntax show password-recovery Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the status of the password-recovery feature: T2600G-28TS(config)# show password-recovery 107 12.15 show user account-list Description The show user account-list command is used to display the information of the current users. Syntax show user account-list Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of the current users: T2600G-28TS(config)# show user account-list 12.16 show user configuration Description The show user configuration command is used to display the security configuration information of the users, including access-control, max-number and the idle-timeout, etc. Syntax show user configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 108 Example Display the security configuration information of the users: T2600G-28TS(config)# show user configuration 12.17 show telnet-status Description The show telnet-status command is used to display the configuration information of the Telnet function. Syntax show telnet-status Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display whether the Telnet function is enabled: T2600G-28TS(config)# show telnet-status 109 Chapter 13 HTTP and HTTPS Commands With the help of HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) or HTTPS (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer), you can manage the switch through a standard browser. HTTP is the protocol to exchange or transfer hypertext. SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) based on TCP. Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A key pair refers to a public key (contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By default the switch has a certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The Certificate/Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair. 13.1 ip http server Description The ip http server command is used to enable the HTTP server within the switch. To disable the HTTP function, use no ip http server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function cannot be disabled at the same time. Syntax ip http server no ip http server Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Disable the HTTP function: T2600G-28TS(config)# no ip http server 110 13.2 ip http max-users (For T2600G-18TS only) Description The ip http max-users command is used to configure the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTP server. To cancel this limitation, use no ip http max-users command. Syntax ip http max-users admin-num operator-num poweruser-num user-num no ip http max-users Parameter admin-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of users should be no more than 16. operator-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Operator, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users should be less than 16. poweruser-num—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Power User, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users should be less than 16. user-num—— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as User, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of users should be less than 16. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum number of the Admin, Operator, Power User and User users logging on to the HTTP server as 5, 3, 2 and 3: 111 T2600G-18TS(config)# ip http max-users 5 3 2 3 13.3 ip http max-users (For other switches) Description The ip http max-users command is used to configure the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTP server. To cancel this limitation, use no ip http max-users command. Syntax ip http max-users admin-num guest-num no ip http max-users Parameter admin-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of Admin and Guest should be less than 16. guest-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTP server as Guest, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of Admin and Guest should be less than 16. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum number of the Admin and Guest users logging on to the HTTP server as 5 and 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http max-users 5 3 112 13.4 ip http session timeout Description The ip http session timeout command is used to configure the connection timeout of the HTTP server. To restore to the default timeout time, use no ip http session timeout command. Syntax ip http session timeout time no ip http session timeout Parameter time ——The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the value is 10. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the timeout time of the HTTP connection as 15 minutes: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http session timeout 15 13.5 ip http secure-server Description The ip http secure-server command is used to enable the HTTPS server within the switch. To disable the HTTPS function, use no ip http secure-server command. This function is enabled by default. The HTTP and HTTPS server function cannot be disabled at the same time. 113 Syntax ip http secure-server no ip http secure-server Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Disable the HTTP function: T2600G-28TS(config)# no ip http secure-server 13.6 ip http secure-protocol Description The ip http secure-protocol command is used to configure the SSL protocol version. To restore to the default SSL version, use no ip http secure-protocol command. By default, the switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1. Syntax ip http secure-protocol { [ ssl3 ] [ tls1 ] } no ip http session Parameter ssl3 —— The SSL 3.0 protocol. tls1 —— The TLS 1.0 protocol Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 114 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the protocol of SSL connection as SSL 3.0: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-protocol ssl3 13.7 ip http secure-ciphersuite Description The ip http secure-ciphersuite command is used to configure the cipherSuites over the SSL connection supported by the switch. To restore to the default ciphersuite types, use no ip http secure-ciphersuite command. Syntax ip http secure-ciphersuite { [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] } no ip http secure-ciphersuite Parameter [ 3des-ede-cbc-sha ] [ rc4-128-md5 ] [ rc4-128-sha ] [ des-cbc-sha ] —— Specify the encryption algorithm and the digest algorithm to use on an SSL connection. By default, the switch supports all these ciphersuites. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the ciphersuite to be used for encryption over the SSL connection as 3des-ede-cbc-sha: 115 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-ciphersuite 3des-ede-cbc-sha 13.8 ip http secure-max-users Description The ip http secure-max-users command is used to configure the maximum number of users that are allowed to connect to the HTTPs server. To cancel this limitation, use no ip http secure-max-users command. Syntax ip http secure-max-users admin-num guest-num no ip secure-max-users Parameter admin-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs server as Admin, ranging from 1 to 16. The total number of Admin and Guest should be less than 16. guest-num —— The maximum number of the users logging on to the HTTPs server as Guest, ranging from 0 to 15.The total number of Admin and Guest should be less than 16. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum number of the Admin and Guest users logging on to the HTTPs server as 5 and 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-max-users 5 3 116 13.9 ip http secure-session timeout Description The ip http secure-session timeout command is used to configure the connection timeout of the HTTPS server. To restore to the default timeout time, use no ip http secure-session timeout command. Syntax ip http secure-session timeout time no ip http secure-session timeout Parameter time —— The timeout time, ranging from 5 to 30 in minutes. By default, the value is 10. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the timeout time of the HTTPs connection as 15 minutes: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-session timeout 15 13.10 ip http secure-server download certificate Description The ip http secure-server download certificate command is used to download a certificate to the switch from TFTP server. Syntax ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert ip-address ip-addr 117 Parameter ssl-cert —— The name of the SSL certificate which is selected to download to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Certificate must be BASE64 encoded. ip-addr —— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP address of 192.168.0.146: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert ip-address 192.168.0.146 Download an SSL Certificate named ssl-cert from TFTP server with the IP address of fe80::1234 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download certificate ssl-cert ip-address fe80::1234 13.11 ip http secure-server download key Description The ip http secure-server download key command is used to download an SSL key to the switch from TFTP server. Syntax ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address ip-addr 118 Parameter ssl-key —— The name of the SSL key which is selected to download to the switch. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The Key must be BASE64 encoded. ip-addr —— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of 192.168.0.146: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address 192.168.0.146 Download an SSL key named ssl-key from TFTP server with the IP address of fe80::1234 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http secure-server download key ssl-key ip-address fe80::1234 13.12 show ip http configuration Description The show ip http configuration command is used to display the configuration information of the HTTP server, including status, session timeout, access-control, max-user number and the idle-timeout, etc. 119 Syntax show ip http configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration information of the HTTP server: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip http configuration 13.13 show ip http secure-server Description The show ip http secure-server command is used to display the global configuration of SSL. Syntax show ip http secure-server Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of SSL: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip http secure-server 120 Chapter 14 ARP Commands Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to resolve an IP address into an Ethernet MAC address. The swich maintains an ARP mapping table to record the IP-to-MAC mapping relations, which is used for forwarding packets. An ARP mapping table contains two types of ARP entries: dynamic and static. An ARP dynamic entry is automatically created and maintained by ARP. A static ARP entry is manually configured and maintained. 14.1 arp Description This arp command is used to add a static ARP entry. To delete the specified ARP entry, use the no arp command. Syntax arp ip mac type no arp ip type Parameter ip —— The IP address of the static ARP entry. mac —— The MAC address of the static ARP entry. type —— The ARP type. Configure it as “arpa”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a static ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.1 and the MAC as 00:11:22:33:44:55: 121 T2600G-28TS(config)# arp 192.168.0.1 00:11:22:33:44:55 arpa 14.2 clear arp-cache Description This clear arp-cache command is used to clear all the dynamic ARP entries. Syntax clear arp-cache Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear all the dynamic ARP entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear arp-cache 14.3 arp timeout Description This arp timeout command is used to configure the ARP aging time of the interface. Syntax arp timeout timeout no arp timeout Parameter timeout —— Specify the aging time, ranging from 1 to 3000 seconds. The default value is 600 seconds. 122 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the ARP aging time as 60 seconds on interface 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# arp timeout 60 14.4 show arp Description This show arp command is used to display the active ARP entries. If no parameter is speicified, all the active ARP entries will be displayed. Syntax show arp [ ip ] [ mac ] show ip arp [ ip ] [ mac ] Parameter ip —— Specify the IP address of your desired ARP entry. mac —— Specify the MAC address of your desired ARP entry. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 123 Example Display the ARP entry with the IP as 192.168.0.2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip arp 192.168.0.2 14.5 show ip arp (interface) Description This show arp command is used to display the active ARP entries associated with a specified Layer 3 interface. Syntax show ip arp { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id | vlan id } Parameter port —— Specify the number of the routed port. port-channel-id —— Specify the ID of the port channel. id —— Specify the VLAN interface ID. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the ARP entry associated with VLAN interface 2 : T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip arp vlan 2 14.6 show ip arp summary Description This show ip arp summary command is used to display the number of the active ARP entries. 124 Syntax show ip arp summary Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the number of the ARP entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip arp summary 125 Chapter 15 Binding Table Commands You can bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together, which can be the condition for the ARP Inspection and IP verify source to filter the packets. 15.1 ip source binding Description The ip source binding command is used to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together manually. You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN. To delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry from the binding table, use no ip source binding index command. Syntax ip source binding hostname ip-addr mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface gigabitEthernet port { none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both } [ forced-source { arp-scanning | dhcp-snooping } ] no ip source binding index idx Parameter hostname ——The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most. ip-addr —— The IP address of the Host. mac-addr —— The MAC address of the Host. vlan-id ——The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094. port —— The number of port connected to the Host. none | arp-detection | ip-verify-source | both ——The protect type for the entry. “arp-detection” indicates ARP detection; “ip-verify-source” indicates IP source filter; “none” indicates applying none; “both” indicates applying both. 126 forced-source —— The source of the binding entry can be specified as “arp-scanning” or “dhcp-snooping”. It is multi-optional. idx —— The entry number needed to be deleted. You can use the show ip source binding command to get the idx. Pay attention that the entry number is the actual number in the binding table which is not display in an arranged order. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind an ACL entry with the IP 192.168.0.1, MAC 00:00:00:00:00:01, VLAN ID 2 and the Port number 5 manually. And then enable the entry for the ARP detection: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip source binding host1 192.168.0.1 00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 2 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 arp-detection Delete the IP-MAC–VID-PORT entry with the index 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#no ip source binding index 5 15.2 ip dhcp snooping Description The ip dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function globally. To disable DHCP Snooping function globally, use no ip dhcp snooping command. DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding. The switch can also propagate the control information and 127 the network parameters via the Option 82 field to provide more information for the Host. Syntax ip dhcp snooping no ip dhcp snooping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DHCP Snooping function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp snooping 15.3 ip dhcp snooping vlan Description The ip dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCP Snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCP Snooping function on this VLAN, use no ip dhcp snooping vlan command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range no ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range Parameter vlan-range —— Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCP snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5. 128 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DHCP Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7 15.4 ip dhcp snooping information option Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To enable the option 82 function on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.3 ip dhcp l2relay information option. Description The ip dhcp snooping information option command is used to enable the Option 82 function of DHCP Snooping on a specified port/port channel. To disable the Option 82 function, use no ip dhcp snooping information option command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping information option no ip dhcp snooping information option Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 129 Example Enable the Option 82 function of DHCP Snooping on port 1/0/1: T2600G-52TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-52TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information option 15.5 ip dhcp snooping information strategy Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the host on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy. Description The ip dhcp snooping information strategy command is used to specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the host on a specified port/port channel. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp snooping information strategy command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping information strategy strategy no ip dhcp snooping information strategy Parameter strategy —— The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host, including three types: keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets. It is the default option; replace: Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one; drop: Indicates to discard the packets including the Option 82 field 130 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Replace the Option 82 field of the packets with the switch defined one and then send out on port 1/0/1: T2600G-52TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-52TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information strategy replace 15.6 ip dhcp snooping information format Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To select the format of option 82 sub-option value field on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format. Description The ip dhcp snooping information format command is used to select the format of option 82 sub-option value field on a specified port/port channel. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp snooping information format command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping information format { normal | private } no ip dhcp snooping information format Parameter normal | private —— The format type of option 82 sub-option value field. normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV (type-length-value). 131 private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you configure for the related sub-option. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV (type-length-value) on port 1/0/1: T2600G-52TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-52TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information format normal 15.7 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To specify the customized Circuit ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id. Description The ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id command is used to specify the customized Circuit ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel. To clear the circuit ID, use no ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id string no ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id Parameter string —— Enter the sub-option Circuit ID, which contains 64 characters at most. 132 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable and configure the customized sub-option Circuit ID for the Option 82 as “tplink” on port 1/0/1: T2600G-52TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-52TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id tplink 15.8 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To specify the customized Remote ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id. Description The ip dhcp snooping information remote-id command is used to specify the customized Remote ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel. To clear the Remote ID, use no ip dhcp snooping information remote-id command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping information remote-id string no ip dhcp snooping information remote-id Parameter string —— Enter the sub-option Remote ID, which contains 64 characters at most. 133 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the customized sub-option Remote ID for the Option 82 as tplink on port 1/0/1: T2600G-52TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-52TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping information remote-id tplink 15.9 ip dhcp snooping trust Description The ip dhcp snooping trust command is used to configure a port to be a Trusted Port. Only the Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP servers. To turn the port back to a distrusted port, use no ip dhcp snooping trust command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping trust no ip dhcp snooping trust Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 134 Example Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 to be a Trusted Port: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping trust 15.10 ip dhcp snooping mac-verify Description The ip dhcp snooping mac-verify command is used to enable the MAC Verify feature. To disable the MAC Verify feature, use no ip dhcp snooping mac-verify command. There are two fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and discard the packet if the two fields are different. Syntax ip dhcp snooping mac-verify no ip dhcp snooping mac-verify Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the MAC Verify feature for the Gigabit Ethernet port 10/2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping mac-verify 135 15.11 ip dhcp snooping limit rate Description The ip dhcp snooping limit rate command is used to enable the Flow Control feature for the DHCP packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded. To restore to the default configuration, use no ip dhcp snooping limit rate command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping limit rate value no ip dhcp snooping limit rate Parameter value —— The value of Flow Control. The options are 5/10/15/20/25/30 (packet/second). The default value is 0, which stands for “disable”. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the Flow Control of GigabitEthernet port 2 as 20 pps: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping limit rate 20 15.12 ip dhcp snooping decline rate Description The ip dhcp snooping decline rate command is used to enable the Decline Protect feature and configure the rate limit on DHCP Decine packets. The 136 excessive DHCP Decline packets will be discarded. To disable the Decline Protect feature, use no ip dhcp snooping decline rate command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping decline rate value no ip dhcp snooping decline rate Parameter value —— Specify the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets, and the optional values are 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and 30 (units:packet/second). It default value is 0, which stands for “disable”. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the rate limit of DHCP Decline packets as 20 packets per second on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping decline 20 15.13 ip dhcp snooping max-entries Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The ip dhcp snooping max-entries command is used to configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on a port via DHCP Snooping. 137 To restore to the default setting, use no ip dhcp snooping max-entries command. Syntax ip dhcp snooping max-entries value no ip dhcp snooping max-entries Syntax value —— Enter the value of maximum number of entries that can be learned on the port via DHCP Snooping. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum number of entries that can be learned on port 1 as 100: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping max-entries 100 15.14 show ip source binding Description The show ip source binding command is used to display the IP-MAC-VID- PORT binding table. Syntax show ip source binding Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 138 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IP-MAC-VID-PORT binding table: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip source binding 15.15 show ip dhcp snooping Description The show ip dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status of DHCP Snooping. Syntax show ip dhcp snooping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the running status of DHCP Snooping: T2600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping 15.16 show ip dhcp snooping interface Description The show ip dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCP Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. 139 Syntax show ip dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping interface Display the DHCP Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS#show ip dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 15.17 show ip dhcp snooping information interface Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. To display the DHCP l2relay configuration of a desired port/port channel or of all ports/port channels for T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS, refer to 50.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface. Description The show ip dhcp snooping information interface command is used to display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of a desired port/port channel or of all ports/port channels. 140 Syntax show ip dhcp snooping information interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-52TS#show ip dhcp snooping information interface Display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-52TS#show ip dhcp snooping information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 141 Chapter 16 IPv6 Binding Table Commands You can bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host together, which can be the condition for the ND Detection and IPv6 Source Guard to filter the packets. 16.1 ipv6 source binding Description The ipv6 source binding command is used to bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together manually. You can manually bind the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN. To delete the IPv6-MAC–VID-PORT entry from the binding table, use no ipv6 source binding index command. Syntax ipv6 source binding hostname ipv6-addr mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface gigabitEthernet port { none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source | both } no ipv6 source binding index idx Parameter hostname ——The Host Name, which contains 20 characters at most. ipv6-addr —— The IPv6 address of the Host. mac-addr —— The MAC address of the Host. vlan-id ——The VLAN ID needed to be bound, ranging from 1 to 4094. port —— The number of port connected to the Host. none | nd-detection | ipv6-verify-source | both ——The protect type for the entry. “nd-detection” indicates ND Detection; “ipv6-verify-source” indicates IPv6 Source Guard; “none” indicates applying none; “both” indicates applying both. 142 idx —— The entry number needed to be deleted. You can use the show ipv6 source binding command to get the idx. Pay attention that the entry number is the actual number in the binding table which is not display in an arranged order. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind an ACL entry with the IP 2001::1, MAC 00:00:00:00:00:01, VLAN ID 2 and the Port number 5 manually. And then enable the entry for the ND Detection: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 source binding host1 2001::1 00:00:00:00:00:01 vlan 2 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 nd-detection Delete the IPv6-MAC–VID-PORT entry with the index 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#no ipv6 source binding index 5 16.2 ipv6 dhcp snooping Description The ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to enable DHCPv6 Snooping function globally. To disable DHCPv6 Snooping function globally, use no ipv6 dhcp snooping command. DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IPv6 address from DHCPv6 server, and record the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding. Syntax ipv6 dhcp snooping 143 no ipv6 dhcp snooping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping 16.3 ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Description The ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command is used to enable DHCPv6 Snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable DHCPv6 Snooping function on this VLAN, use no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command. Syntax ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan vlan-range Parameter vlan-range —— Specify the VLANs to enable the DHCPv6 snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 144 Example Enable the DHCPv6 Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan 1,4,6-7 16.4 ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Description The ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command is used to configure a port to be a Trusted Port. Only the Trusted Port can forward the DHCPv6 packets from DHCPv6 servers. To turn the port back to a distrusted port, use no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust command. Syntax ipv6 dhcp snooping trust no ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 to be a Trusted Port: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp snooping trust 145 16.5 ipv6 nd snooping Description The ipv6 nd snooping command is used to enable ND Snooping function globally. To disable ND Snooping function globally, use no ipv6 nd snooping command. ND Snooping functions to monitor the process of the duplication address detection, And record the IPv6 address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding. Syntax ipv6 nd snooping no ipv6 nd snooping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the ND Snooping function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd snooping 16.6 ipv6 nd snooping vlan Description The ipv6 nd snooping vlan command is used to enable ND Snooping function on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Snooping function on this VLAN, use no ipv6 nd snooping vlan command. Syntax ipv6 nd snooping vlan vlan-range no ipv6 nd snooping vlan vlan-range 146 Parameter vlan-range —— Specify the VLANs to enable the ND snooping function, in the format of 1-3, 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the ND Snooping function on VLAN 1,4,6-7: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd snooping vlan 1,4,6-7 16.7 ipv6 nd snooping max-entries Description The ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command is used to specify the maximum number of binding entries that are allow to be binded to a port. To return the default, use no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries command. Syntax ipv6 nd snooping max-entries value no ipv6 nd snooping max-entries Parameter value —— Specify the maximum number of ND snooping entries on this interface. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 147 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum number of binding entries from ND Snooping of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 is 100: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ipv6 nd snooping max-entries 100 16.8 show ipv6 source binding Description The show ipv6 source binding command is used to display the IPv6-MAC-VID- PORT binding table. Syntax show ipv6 source binding Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IPv6-MAC-VID-PORT binding table: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 source binding 148 16.9 show ipv6 dhcp snooping Description The show ipv6 dhcp snooping command is used to display the running status of DHCPv6 Snooping. Syntax show ipv6 dhcp snooping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the running status of DHCPv6 Snooping: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping 16.10 show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface Description The show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface command is used to display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. Syntax show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. 149 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface Display the DHCPv6 Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 dhcp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 16.11 show ipv6 nd snooping Description The show ipv6 nd snooping command is used to display the running status of ND Snooping. Syntax show ipv6 nd snooping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the running status of ND Snooping: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping 150 16.12 show ipv6 nd snooping interface Description The show ipv6 nd snooping interface command is used to display the ND Snooping configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. Syntax show ipv6 nd snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the ND Snooping configuration of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping interface Display the ND Snooping configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 nd snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 151 Chapter 17 IP Verify Source Commands IP Verify Source is to filter the IP packets based on the IP-MAC Binding entries. Only the packets matched to the IP-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the bandwidth utility. 17.1 ip verify source Description The ip verify source command is used to configure the IP Verify Source mode for a specified port. To disable the IP Verify Source function, use no ip verify source command. Syntax ip verify source { sip+mac } no ip verify source Parameter sip+mac —— Security type. “sip+mac” indicates that only the packets with its source IP address, source MAC address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be processed. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IP Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10. Configure that only the packets with its source IP address, source MAC 152 address and port number matched to the IP-MAC binding rules can be processed: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip verify source sip+mac 17.2 show ip verify source Description The show ip verify source command is used to display the IP Verify Source configuration information. Syntax show ip verify source Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IP Verify Source configuration information: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip verify source 17.3 show ip verify source interface Description The show ip verify source interface command is used to display the IP verify source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port. Syntax show ip verify source interface gigabitEthernet port 153 Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IP verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS#show ip verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 154 Chapter 18 IPv6 Verify Source Commands IPv6 Verify Source is to filter the IPv6 packets based on the IPv6-MAC Binding entries. Only the packets matched to the IPv6-MAC Binding rules can be processed, which can enhance the bandwidth utility. Before configuring IPv6 Verify Source feature, you should configure the SDM template as “enterpriseV6” and save your configurations. For more information about SDM configuration, refer to sdm prefer. 18.1 ipv6 verify source Description The ipv6 verify source command is used to configure the IPv6 Verify Source mode for a specified port. To disable the IPv6 Verify Source function, use no ipv6 verify source command. Syntax ipv6 verify source { sipv6+mac } no ipv6 verify source Parameter sipv6+mac —— Security type. “sipv6+mac” indicates that only the packets with its source IPv6 address, source MAC address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 155 Example Enable the IPv6 Verify Source function for Gigabit Ethernet ports 5-10. Configure that only the packets with its source IPv6 address, source MAC address and port number matched to the IPv6-MAC binding rules can be processed: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/5-10 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 verify source sipv6+mac 18.2 show ipv6 verify source Description The show ipv6 verify source command is used to display the IPv6 Verify Source configuration information. Syntax show ipv6 verify source Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IPv6 Verify Source configuration information: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 verify source 18.3 show ipv6 verify source interface Description The show ipv6 verify source interface command is used to display the IPv6 verify source configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port. 156 Syntax show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet port Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IPv6 verify source configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS#show ipv6 verify source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 157 Chapter 19 ND Detection Commands The ND Detection feature allows the switch to detect the ND packets based on the binding entries in the IPv6-MAC Binding Table and filter out the illegal ND packets. Before configuring ND Detection, complete IPv6-MAC Binding configuration. For details, refer to IPv6-MAC Binding Configurations. 19.1 ipv6 nd detection Description The ipv6 nd detection command is used to enable the ND Detection function globally. To disable the ND Detection function, use no ipv6 nd detection command. Syntax Ipv6 nd detection no ipv6 nd detection Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Example Enable the ND Detection function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd detection 19.2 ipv6 nd detection vlan Description The ipv6 nd detection vlan command is used to enable ND Detection function on a specified VLAN. To disable ND Detection function on this VLAN, use no ipv6 nd detection vlan command. 158 Syntax ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range no ipv6 nd detection vlan vlan-range Parameter vlan-range ——Enter the vlan range in the format of 1-3, 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Example Enable the ND Detection function on VLAN 1,4,6-7: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 nd detection vlan 1,4,6-7 19.3 ipv6 nd detection trust Description The ipv6 nd detection trust command is used to configure the port for which the ND Detection function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the Trusted Port list, use no ipv6 nd detection trust command .The specific port, such as up-linked port, routing port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, configure the ND Detection Trusted Port before enabling the ND Detection function. Syntax Ipv6 nd detection trust no ipv6 nd detection trust Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet/ interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 159 Example Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 nd detection trust 19.4 show ipv6 nd detection Description The show ipv6 nd detection command is used to display the ND detection global configuration including the enable/disable status. Syntax show ipv6 nd detection Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Example Display the ND Detection configuration globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection 19.5 show ipv6 nd detection interface Description The show ipv6 nd detection interface command is used to display the interface configuration of ND Detection. Syntax show ipv6 nd detection interface[ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] 160 Parameter port ——The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Example Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ipv6 nd detection interface 161 Chapter 20 ARP Inspection Commands ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) Detect function is to protect the switch from the ARP cheating, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc. 20.1 ip arp inspection(global) Description The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Detection function globally. To disable the ARP Detection function, use no ip arp detection command. Syntax ip arp inspection no ip arp inspection Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the ARP Detection function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip arp inspection 20.2 ip arp inspection trust Description The ip arp inspection trust command is used to configure the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary as the Trusted Port. To clear the Trusted Port list, use no ip arp detection trust command .The specific ports, 162 such as up-linked port and routing port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To ensure the normal communication of the switch, configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect function. Syntax ip arp inspection trust no ip arp inspection trust Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-5 as the Trusted Port: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection trust 20.3 ip arp inspection(interface) Description The ip arp inspection command is used to enable the ARP Defend function. To disable the ARP detection function, use no ip arp inspection command. ARP Attack flood produces lots of ARP Packets, which will occupy the bandwidth and slow the network speed extremely. With the ARP Defend enabled, the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300 seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood. Syntax ip arp inspection 163 no ip arp inspection Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the arp defend function for the Gigabit Ethernet ports 1/0/2-6: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-6 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip arp inspection 20.4 ip arp inspection limit-rate Description The ip arp inspection limit-rate command is used to configure the ARP speed of a specified port. To restore to the default speed, use no ip arp inspection limit-rate command. Syntax ip arp inspection limit-rate value no ip arp inspection limit-rate Parameter value ——The value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second, ranging from 10 to 100 in pps(packet/second). By default, the value is 15. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) 164 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum amount of the received ARP packets per second as 50 pps for Gigabit Ethernet port 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip arp inspection limit-rate 50 20.5 ip arp inspection recover Description The ip arp inspection recover command is used to restore a port to the ARP transmit status from the ARP filter status. Syntax ip arp inspection recover Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Restore Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/5 to the ARP transmit status: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip arp inspection recover 165 20.6 show ip arp inspection Description The show ip arp inspection command is used to display the ARP detection global configuration including the enable/disable status and the Trusted Port list. Syntax show ip arp inspection Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the ARP detection configuration globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection 20.7 show ip arp inspection interface Description The show ip arp inspection interface command is used to display the interface configuration of ARP detection. Syntax show ip arp inspection interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port ——The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 166 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Display the configuration of all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection interface 20.8 show ip arp inspection statistics Description The show ip arp inspection statistics command is used to display the number of the illegal ARP packets received. Syntax show ip arp inspection statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the number of the illegal ARP packets received: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip arp inspection statistics 167 20.9 clear ip arp inspection statistics Description The clear ip arp inspection statistics command is used to clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received. Syntax clear ip arp inspection statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the statistic of the illegal ARP packets received: T2600G-28TS(config)#clear ip arp inspection statistics 168 Chapter 21 DoS Defend Commands DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host. With the DoS Defend enabled, the switch can analyze the specific field of the received packets and provide the defend measures to ensure the normal working of the local network. 21.1 ip dos-prevent Description The ip dos-prevent command is used to enable the DoS defend function globally. To disable the DoS defend function, use no ip dos-prevent command. Syntax ip dos-prevent no ip dos-prevent Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DoS defend function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip dos-prevent 169 21.2 ip dos-prevent type Description The ip dos-prevent type command is used to select the DoS Defend Type. To disable the corresponding Defend Type, use no ip dos-prevent type command. Syntax ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan | port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke } no ip dos-prevent type { land | scan-synfin | xma-scan | null-scan | port-less-1024 | blat | ping-flood | syn-flood | win-nuke } Parameter land —— Land attack. scan-synfin —— Scan SYNFIN attack. xma-scan —— Xma Scan attack. null-scan —— NULL Scan attack. port-less-1024 ——The SYN packets whose Source Port less than 1024. blat —— Blat attack. ping-flood —— Ping flooding attack. With the ping flood attack enabled, the switch will limit automatically the forwarding speed of ping packets to 512K when attacked by ping flood. syn-flood —— SYN/SYN-ACK flooding attack. With the syn-flood attack enabled, the switch will limit automatically the forwarding speed of ping packets to 512K when attacked by syn-flood. win-nuke —— winNuke attack. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 170 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DoS Defend Type named Land attack: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip dos-prevent type land 21.3 show ip dos-prevent Description The show ip dos-prevent command is used to display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack, including enable/disable status, the DoS Defend Type, the count of the attack, etc. Syntax show ip dos-prevent Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DoS information of the detected DoS attack globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip dos-prevent 171 Chapter 22 IEEE 802.1X Commands IEEE 802.1X function is to provide an access control for LAN ports via the authentication. An 802.1X system include three entities: supplicant, authenticator and authentication server. Supplicant: the device that requests access to the LAN. Authentication server: performs the actual authentication of the supplicant. It validates the identity of the supplicant and notifies the authenticator whether or not the supplicant is authorized to access the LAN. Authenticator: controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the supplicant. It is usually an 802.1X-supported network device, such as this TP-Link switch. It acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the supplicant and the authentication server, requesting identity information from the supplicant, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the supplicant. This chapter handles with the authentication process between the supplicant and the switch. To realize the authentication and accounting function, you should also enbable the AAA function and configure the RADIUS server. Go to Chapter 44 AAA Commands for more details. 22.1 dot1x system-auth-control Description The dot1x system-auth-control command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1X function, use no dot1x system-auth-control command. Syntax dot1x system-auth-control no dot1x system-auth-control Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 172 Example Enable the IEEE 802.1X function: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x system-auth-control 22.2 dot1x handshake Description The dot1x handshake command is used enable the handshake feature. The handshake feature is used to detect the connection status between the TP-Link 802.1x supplicant and the switch. disable the handshake feature if you are using a non-TP-Link 802.1x-compliant client software. This feature is enabled by default. Syntax dot1x handshake no dot1x handshake Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Disable the 802.1X handshake function: T2600G-28TS(config)# no dot1x handshake 22.3 dot1x auth-method Description The dot1x auth-method command is used to configure the Authentication Method of IEEE 802.1X and the default 802.1x authentication method is “eap”. 173 To restore to the default 802.1x authentication method, use no dot1x auth-method command. Syntax dot1x auth-method { pap | eap } no dot1x auth-method Parameter pap | eap ——Authentication Methods. pap: EAP termination mode. IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch and the client. The EAP packets are terminated at the switch and repackaged in the Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) packets, and then transferred to the RADIUS server. eap: EAP relay mode. IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to exchange information between the switch and the client. The EAP protocol packets with authentication data are encapsulated in the advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets and transmitted to the authentication server. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Authentication Method of IEEE 802.1X as “pap”: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x auth-method pap 174 22.4 dot1x accounting Description The dot1x accounting command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X accounting function globally. To disable the IEEE 802.1X accounting function, use no dot1x accounting command. Syntax dot1x accounting no dot1x accounting Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the enable the IEEE 802.1X accounting function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x accounting 22.5 dot1x vlan-assignment Description The dot1x vlan-assignment command is used to enable the 802.1X VLAN assignment feature. 802.1x VLAN assignment is a technology allowing the RADIUS server to send the VLAN assignment to the port when the port is authenticated. If the assigned VLAN does not exist on the switch, the switch will create the related VLAN automatically, add the authenticated port to the VLAN and change the PVID based on the assigned VLAN. If the assigned VLAN exists on the switch, the switch will directly add the authenticated port to the related VLAN and change the PVID instead of 175 creating a new VLAN. If no VLAN is supplied by the RADIUS server or if 802.1x authentication is disabled, the port will be in its original VLAN after successful authentication. To disable the 802.1X VLAN assignment feature, use no dot1x vlan-assignment command. Syntax dot1x vlan-assignment no dot1x vlan-assignment Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the 802.1X VLAN assignment feature globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# dot1x vlan-assignment 22.6 dot1x guest-vlan(global) Description The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to enable the Guest VLAN function globally. To disable the Guest VLAN function, use no dot1x guest-vlan command. Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vid no dot1x guest-vlan 176 Parameter vid —— The VLAN ID needed to enable the Guest VLAN function, ranging from 2 to 4094. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access the specified network source. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Guest VLAN function for VLAN 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x guest-vlan 5 22.7 dot1x quiet-period Description The dot1x quiet-period command is used to enable the quiet-period function. To disable the function, use no dot1x quiet-period command. Syntax dot1x quiet-period [ time ] no dot1x quiet-period Parameter time —— The length of the quiet-period time. If one user’s authentication fails, its subsequent IEEE 802.1x authentication requests will not be processed during the quiet-period time. It ranges from 1 to 999 seconds and the default value is 10 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 177 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the quiet-period function: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x quiet-period Enable the quiet-period function and set the quiet-period as 5 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x quiet-period 5 22.8 dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout Description The dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout command is used to configure the supplicant timeout. To restore to the default, use no dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout command. Syntax dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout time no dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout Parameter time ——The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from supplicant before resending a request to the supplicant., ranging from 1 to 9 in second. By default, it is 3 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 178 Example Configure the supplicant timeout value as 5 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x timeout supplicant-timeout 5 22.9 dot1x max-reauth-req Description The dot1x max-reauth-req command is used to configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request when the server cannot be connected. To restore to the default value, use no dot1x max-reauth-req command. Syntax dot1x max-reauth-req times no dot1x max-reauth-req Parameter times —— The maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request, ranging from 1 to 9 in times. By default, the value is 3. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the maximum transfer times of the repeated authentication request as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#dot1x max-reauth-req 5 179 22.10 dot1x Description The dot1x command is used to enable the IEEE 802.1X function for a specified port. To disable the IEEE 802.1X function for a specified port, use no dot1x command. Syntax dot1x no dot1x Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IEEE 802.1X function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x 22.11 dot1x guest-vlan(interface) Description The dot1x guest-vlan command is used to enable the guest VLAN function for a specified port. To disable the Guest VLAN function for a specified port, use no dot1x guest-vlan command. ensure that the Control Type of the corresponding port is port-based before enabling the guest VLAN function for it. 180 Syntax dot1x guest-vlan no dot1x guest-vlan Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Guest VLAN function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x guest-vlan 22.12 dot1x mab Description The dot1x mab command is used to enable the MAB (MAC-Based Authentication Bypass) feature for the port. With MAB feature enabled, the switch automatically sends the authentication server a RADIUS access request frame with the client’s MAC address as the username and password. It is also necessary to configure the RADIUS server with the client’s information for authentication. You can enable this feature on IEEE 802.1x ports connected to devices without 802.1X capability. For example, most printers, IP phones and fax machines do not have 802.1X capability. To disable the MAB feature for the port, use no dot1x mab command. Syntax dot1x mab no dot1x mab 181 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the MAB feature for Gigabit Ethernet port 20: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x mab 22.13 dot1x port-control Description The dot1x port-control command is used to configure the Control Mode of IEEE 802.1X for the specified port. By default, the control mode is “auto”. To restore to the default configuration, use no dot1x port-control command. Syntax dot1x port-control {auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force} no dot1x port-control Parameter auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force —— The Control Mode for the port. auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after passing the 802.1X Authentication. authorized-force: In this mode, the port can work normally without passing the 802.1X Authentication. 182 unauthorized-force: In this mode, the port is forbidden working for its fixed unauthorized status. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Control Mode “authorized-force”: for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x port-control authorized-force 22.14 dot1x port-method Description The dot1x port-method command is used to configure the control type of IEEE 802.1X for the specified port. By default, the control type is “mac-based”. To restore to the default configuration, use no dot1x port-method command. Syntax dot1x port-method { mac-based | port-based } no dot1x port-method Parameter mac-based | port-based ——The control type for the port. mac-based: Any client connected to the port should pass the 802.1X authentication for access. 183 port-based: All the clients connected to the port can access the network on the condition that any one of the clients has passed the 802.1X Authentication. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Control Type for Gigabit Ethernet port 20 as “port-based”: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#dot1x port-method port-based 22.15 show dot1x global Description The show dot1x global command is used to display the global configuration of 801.X. Syntax show dot1x global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of 801.X globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x global 184 22.16 show dot1x interface Description The show dot1x interface command is used to display all ports or the specified port’s configuration information of 801.X. Syntax show dot1x interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. If not specified, the information of all the ports will be displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration information of 801.X for Gigabit Ethernet port 20: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/20 Display the configuration information of 801.X for all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS(config)#show dot1x interface 185 Chapter 23 PPPoE ID-Insertion Commands The PPPoE ID-Insertion feature provides a way to extract a Vendor-specific tag as an identifier for the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) access requests on an Ethernet interface. When enabled, the switch attaches a tag to the PPPoE discovery packets, which is called the PPPoE Vendor-Specific tag and it contains a unique line identifier. There are two formats of Vendor-specific tags: Circuit-ID format and Remote-ID format. The BRAS receives the tagged packet, decodes the tag, and uses the Circuit-ID/Remote-ID field of that tag as a NAS-Port-ID attribute in the RADIUS server for PPP authentication and AAA (authentication, authorization, and Circuit-ID/Remote-ID accounting) tag from access the requests. received Session-confirmation packets from the BRAS. 23.1 The PPPoE switch Active will Discovery remove Offer the and pppoe id-insertion(global) Description The pppoe id-insertion command is used to enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function globally. To disable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function, use no pppoe id-insertion command. Syntax pppoe id-insertion no pppoe id-insertion Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the PPPoE ID-Insertion function: T2600G-28TS(config)# pppoe id-insertion 186 23.2 pppoe circuit-id(interface) Description The pppoe circuit-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function for a specified port. To disable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function on a specified port, use no pppoe circuit-id command. Syntax pppoe circuit-id no pppoe circuit-id Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id 23.3 pppoe circuit-id type Description The pppoe circuit-id type command is used to configure the type of PPPoE Circuit-ID for a specified port. By default, the PPPoE Circuit-ID type is “ip”. Syntax pppoe circuit-id type { mac | ip | udf [Value] | udf-only [Value] } 187 Parameter mac | ip | udf | udf-only —— The type of PPPoE Circuit-ID for the port. mac: The MAC address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option. ip: The IP address of the switch will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option. This is the default value. udf: A user specified string with the maximum length of 40 characters will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option. udf-only: Only the user specified string with the maximum length of 40 will be used to encode the Circuit-ID option. Value —— The value of udf/udf-only. The maximum length is 40 characters. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the type of PPPoE Circuit-ID as “mac” for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe circuit-id type mac 23.4 pppoe remote-id Description The pppoe remote-id command is used to enable the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion and configure the Remote-ID value for a specified port. To disable 188 the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion function on a specified port, use no pppoe remote-id command. By default, the PPPoE Remote-ID Insertion is disabled. Syntax pppoe remote-id [Value] no pppoe remote-id Parameter Value —— The value of UDF. The maximum length is 40 characters. If not specified, the default value will be the PPPoE client’s MAC address. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the remote-ID as “mac” for the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS (config-if)# pppoe remote-id mac 23.5 show pppoe id-insertion global Description The show pppoe id-insertion global command is used to display the global configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function. Syntax show pppoe id-insertion global 189 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function globally: T2600G-28TS # show pppoe circuit-id global 23.6 show pppoe id-insertion interface Description The show pppoe id-insertion interface command is used to display all ports’ or the specified port’s configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function. Syntax show pppoe id-insertion interface [gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Fast/Gigabit Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration information of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function of all Ethernet ports: T2600G-28TS# show pppoe id-insertion interface 190 Display the configuration of PPPoE Circuit-ID Insertion function of the Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 : T2600G-28TS# show pppoe id-insertion interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 191 Chapter 24 System Log Commands The log information will record the settings and operation of the switch respectively for you to monitor operation status and diagnose malfunction. 24.1 logging buffer Description The logging buffer command is used to store the system log messages to an internal buffer. To disable the log buffer function, use the no logging buffer command. Local Log is the system log information saved in the switch. It has two output channels, that is, it can be saved to two different positions, log buffer and log flash memory. The log buffer indicates the RAM for saving system log and the information in the log buffer can be got by show logging buffer command. It will be lost when the switch is restarted. Syntax logging buffer no logging buffer Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the system log buffer: T2600G-28TS(config)#logging buffer 192 24.2 logging buffer level Description The logging buffer level command is used to configure the severity level and the status of the configuration input to the log buffer. To return to the default configuration, use no logging buffer level command. Syntax logging buffer level level no logging buffer level Parameter level —— Severity level of the log information output to each channel. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information with level 0-6 will be saved in the log buffer. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Set the severity level as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#logging buffer level 5 24.3 logging file flash Description The logging file flash command is used to store the log messages in a file in the flash on the switch. To disable the log file flash function, use no logging file flash command. This function is disabled by default. The log file flash 193 indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The information in the log file of the flash will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can be got by the show logging flash command. Syntax logging file flash no logging file flash Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the log file flash function: T2600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash 24.4 logging file flash frequency Description The logging file flash frequency command is used to specify the frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash. To resume the default synchronizing frequency, use the no logging file flash frequency command. Syntax logging file flash frequency { periodic periodic | immediate } no logging file flash frequency Parameter periodic —— The frequency to synchronize the system log file in the log buffer to the flash, ranging from 1 to 48 hours. By default, the synchronization process takes place every 24 hours. 194 immediate —— The system log file in the buffer will be synchronized to the flash immediately. This option will reduce the life of the flash and is not recommended. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the log file synchronization frequency as 10 hours: T2600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash frequency periodic10 24.5 logging file flash level Description The logging file flash level command is used to specify the system log message severity level. Messages will a severity level equal to or higher than this value will be stored to the flash. To restore to the default level, use no logging file flash level command. Syntax logging file flash level level no logging file flash level Parameter level —— Severity level of the log message. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be saved to the flash. By default, it is 3 indicating that the log message marked with 0~3 will be saved in the log flash. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 195 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Save the log messages with their severities equal or higher than 7 to the flash : T2600G-28TS(config)#logging file flash level 7 24.6 logging host index Description The logging host index command is used to configure the Log Host. To clear the configuration of the specified Log Host, use no logging host index command. Log Host is to receive the system log from other devices. You can remotely monitor the settings and operation status of other devices through the log host. Syntax logging host index idx host-ip level no logging host index idx Parameter idx —— The index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log hosts at most. host-ip —— The IP for the log host. level —— The severity level of the log information sent to each log host. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be sent to the corresponding log host. By default, it is 6 indicating that the log information marked with 0~6 will be sent to the log host. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 196 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable log host 2 and set its IP address as 192.168.0.148, the level 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# logging host index 2 192.168.0.148 5 24.7 logging console Description The logging console command is used to send the system logs to the console port. To disable logging to the console, use no logging console command. This function is enabled by default. Syntax logging console no logging console Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable logging to the console port: T2600G-28TS(config)# logging console 24.8 logging console level Description The logging console level command is used to limit messages logged to the console port. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be 197 displayed on the console port. To restore the threshold level to default value, use no logging console level command. Syntax logging console level level no logging monitor level Parameter level —— Severity level of the log information output to the console port. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the console port: T2600G-28TS(config)# logging console level 7 24.9 logging monitor Description The logging monitor command is used to display the system logs on the terminal devices. To disable logging to the terminal, use no logging monitor command. This function is enabled by default. Syntax logging monitor 198 no logging monitor Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Disable logging to the terminal devices: T2600G-28TS(config)# no logging monitor 24.10 logging monitor level Description The logging monitor level command is used to limit messages logged to the terminal devices. System logs no higher than the set threshold level will be displayed on the terminal devices. To restore the threshold level to default value, use no logging monitor level command. Syntax logging monitor level level no logging monitor level Parameter level —— Severity level of the log information output to the terminal devices. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The smaller value has the higher priority. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value will be output to the terminal devices. By default, it is 5 indicating that all the log information between level 0-5 will be output to the terminal devices. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 199 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Output the log information with severity levels between 0-7 to the terminal devices: T2600G-28TS(config)# logging monitor level 7 24.11 clear logging Description The clear logging command is used to clear the information in the log buffer and log file. Syntax clear logging [ buffer | flash ] Parameter buffer | flash —The output channels: buffer and flash. Clear the information of the two channels, by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the information in the log file: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear logging buffer 200 24.12 show logging local-config Description The show logging local-config command is used to display the configuration of the Local Log output to the console, the terminal, the log buffer and the log file. Syntax show logging local-config Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of the Local Log: T2600G-28TS(config)# show logging local-config 24.13 show logging loghost Description The show logging loghost command is used to display the configuration of the log host. Syntax show logging loghost [ index ] Parameter index ——The index of the log host whose configuration will be displayed, ranging from 1 to 4. Display the configuration of all the log hosts by default. 201 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of the log host 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show logging loghost 2 24.14 show logging buffer Description The show logging buffer command is used to display the log information in the log buffer according to the severity level. Syntax show logging buffer [ level level ] Parameter level —— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will display. Display all the log information in the log buffer by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the log information from level 0 to level 5 in the log buffer: T2600G-28TS(config)# show logging buffer level 5 202 24.15 show logging flash Description The show logging flash command is used to display the log information in the log file according to the severity level. Syntax show logging flash [ level level ] Parameter level —— Severity level. There are 8 severity levels marked with values 0-7. The information of levels with priority not lower than the select level will display. Display all the log information in the log file by default. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the log information with the level marked 0~3 in the log file: T2600G-28TS(config)# show logging flash level 3 203 Chapter 25 SSH Commands SSH (Security Shell) can provide the unsecured remote management with security and powerful authentication to ensure the security of the management information. 25.1 ip ssh server Description The ip ssh server command is used to enable SSH function. To disable the SSH function, use no ip ssh server command. Syntax ip ssh server no ip ssh server Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the SSH function: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh server 25.2 ip ssh version Description The ip ssh version command is used to enable the SSH protocol version. To disable the protocol version, use no ip ssh version command. 204 Syntax ip ssh version { v1 | v2 } no ip ssh version { v1 | v2 } Parameter v1 | v2 —— The SSH protocol version to be enabled. They represent SSH v1 and SSH v2 respectively. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable SSH v2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh version v2 25.3 ip ssh algorithm Description The ip ssh algorithm command is used to configure the algorithm in SSH function. To disable the specified algorithm, use no ip ssh algorithm command. Syntax ip ssh algorithm { AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC | Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 } no ip ssh algorithm Parameter AES128-CBC | AES192-CBC | AES256-CBC | Blowfish-CBC | Cast128-CBC | 3DES-CBC | HMAC-SHA1 | HMAC-MD5 —— Specify the SSH algorithm. 205 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the SSH algorithm as AES128-CBC: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh algorithm AES128-CBC 25.4 ip ssh timeout Description The ip ssh timeout command is used to specify the idle-timeout time of SSH. To restore to the factory defaults, use ip ssh timeout command. Syntax ip ssh timeout value no ip ssh timeout Parameter value —— The Idle-timeout time. During this period, the system will automatically release the connection if there is no operation from the client. It ranges from 1 to 120 in seconds. By default, this value is 120 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the idle-timeout time of SSH as 30 seconds: 206 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh timeout 30 25.5 ip ssh max-client Description The ip ssh max-client command is used to specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. To return to the default configuration, use no ip ssh max-client command. Syntax ip ssh max-client num no ip ssh max-client Parameter num —— The maximum number of the connections to the SSH server. It ranges from 1 to 5. By default, this value is 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH server as 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh max-client 3 25.6 ip ssh download Description The ip ssh download command is used to download the SSH key file from TFTP server. 207 Syntax ip ssh download { v1 | v2 } key-file ip-address ip-addr Parameter v1 | v2 —— Select the type of SSH key to download, v1 represents SSH-1, v2 represents SSH-2. key-file —— The name of the key-file which is selected to download. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 25 characters. The key length of the downloaded file must be in the range of 512 to 3072 bits. ip-addr —— The IP address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP address 192.168.0.148: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address 192.168.0.148 Download an SSH-1 type key file named ssh-key from TFTP server with the IP address fe80::1234: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip ssh download v1 ssh-key ip-address fe80::1234 25.7 remove public-key Description The remove public-key command is used to remove the SSH public key from the switch. 208 Syntax remove public-key { v1 | v2 } Parameter v1 | v2 —— Select the type of SSH public key, v1 represents SSH-1, v2 represents SSH-2. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Remove the SSH-1 type public key from the switch: T2600G-28TS# remove public-key v1 25.8 show ip ssh Description The show ip ssh command is used to display the global configuration of SSH. Syntax show ip ssh Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of SSH: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip ssh 209 Chapter 26 MAC Address Commands MAC Address configuration can improve the network security by configuring the Port Security and maintaining the address information by managing the Address Table. 26.1 mac address-table static Description The mac address-table static command is used to add the static MAC address entry. To remove the corresponding entry, use no mac address-table static command. The static address can be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and enhance the efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably. Syntax mac address-table static mac-addr vid vid interface gigabitEthernet port no mac address-table static { mac-addr | vid vid | mac-addr vid vid | interface gigabitEthernet port } Parameter mac-addr ——The MAC address of the entry you desire to add. vid —— The VLAN ID number of your desired entry. It ranges from 1 to 4094. port —— The Ethernet port number of your desired entry. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 210 Example Add a static Mac address entry to bind the MAC address 00:02:58:4f:6c:23, VLAN1 and port 1 together: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table static 00:02:58:4f:6c:23 vid 1 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 26.2 mac address-table aging-time Description The mac address-table aging-time command is used to configure aging time for the dynamic address. To return to the default configuration, use no mac address-table aging-time command. Syntax mac address-table aging-time aging-time no mac address-table aging-time Parameter aging-time —— The aging time for the dynamic address. The value of it can be 0 or ranges from 10 to 630 seconds. When 0 is entered, the Auto Aging function is disabled. It is 300 by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the aging time as 500 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table aging-time 500 211 26.3 mac address-table filtering Description The mac address-table filtering command is used to add the filtering address entry. To delete the corresponding entry, use no mac address-table filtering command. The filtering address function is to forbid the undesired package to be forwarded. The filtering address can be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. Syntax mac address-table filtering mac-addr vid vid no mac address-table filtering {[ mac-addr ] [ vid vid ]} Parameter mac-addr —— The MAC address to be filtered. vid —— The corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address. It ranges from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a filtering address entry of which VLAN ID is 1 and MAC address is 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table filtering 00:1e:4b:04:01:5d vid 1 212 26.4 mac address-table notification Description The mac address-table notification command is used to configure global settings of MAC address table notification. Syntax mac address-table notification { [ global-status enable | disable ] [ table-full-status enable | disable ] [ interval time ] } Parameter global-status enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the notification function globally. table-full-status enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the MAC threshold notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the threshold of the switch’s MAC address table is reached or exceeded. interval time —— Specify the notification trap interval between each set of traps that are generated to the NMS. The interval ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds and it’s 1 second by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the global MAC address notification and table full notification, specify the notification sending interval as 2 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status enable table-full-status enable interval 2 213 26.5 mac address-table max-mac-count Description The mac address-table max-mac-count command is used to configure the Port Security. To return to the default configurations, use no mac address-table max-mac-count command. Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC address attack by limiting the maximum number of the MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with Port Security feature enabled will learned the MAC address dynamically. When the learned MAC address number reaches the maximum, the port will stop learning. Therefore, the other devices with the MAC address unlearned can not access to the network via this port. Syntax mac address-table max-mac-count { [ max-number num ] [ mode { dynamic | static | permanent } ] [ status { forward | drop | disable } ] } no mac address-table max-mac-count [ max-number | mode | status ] Parameter num —— The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. It ranges from 0 to 64. By default this value is 64. dynamic | static | permanent —— Learn mode for MAC addresses. There are three modes, including Dynamic mode, Static mode and Permanent mode. When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging time. When Static mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually. The learned entries will be cleared after the switch is rebooted. When permanent mode is selected, the learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the aging time and can only be deleted manually too. However, the learned entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted. status —— Select the action to be taken when the number of the MAC addresses reaches the maximum learning number on the port. By default this function is disabled. 214 • forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned MAC number exceeds the the maximum MAC address number on this port. • drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds the the maximum MAC address number on this port. • disable: The MAC address threshold on this port is disabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable Port Security function for port 1/0/1, select Static mode as the learn mode, and specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this port as 30. When the number of MAC address entries reaches 30 on this port, new entry will be dropped : T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# mac address-table max-mac-count max-number 30 mode static status drop 26.6 mac address-table notification (interface) Description The mac address-table notification command is used to configure the MAC change notification on port. Syntax mac address-table notification { [ learn-mode-change enable | disable ] [ exceed-max-learned enable | disable ] [ new-mac-learned enable | disable ] } 215 Parameter learn-mode-change enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the learn-mode-change notification. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the learning mode of this port changes. To configure the learning mode configuration, refer to mac address-table max-mac-count. exceed-max-learned enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the MAC address threshold notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the MAC address threshold limit on this port is reached or exceeded. To configure the port’s MAC address threshold, refer to mac address-table max-mac-count. new-mac-learned enable | disable —— Enable/Disable the new-mac-learned notification on this port. With this feature enabled, a SNMP notification is generated and sent to the network management system (NMS) when the port learns a new MAC address. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the learn-mode-change notification on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table notification global-status enable T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# mac address-table notification learn-mode-change enable 216 26.7 mac address-table security Description The mac address-table security command is used to configure security of the MAC address table in a specified VLAN. Syntax mac address-table security vid vid max-learn number { forward | drop | disable } Parameter vid —— Speicify the VLAN ID to configure its MAC address table. number —— Configure the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN. It ranges from 0 to 16383. forward | drop | disable —— Choose the mode when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN. • Drop: The packets will be dropped when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.. • Forward: The packets will be forward but not be learned when learned MAC number exceeds the threshold of the MAC address table in this VLAN.. • Disable: The threshold of the MAC address table is disabled. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the max learned MAC address number is VLAN 2 as 1000, and drop the packets that have no match in the MAC address table: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac address-table security vid 2 max-learn 1000 drop 217 26.8 show mac address-table Description The show mac address-table command is used to display the information of all address entries. Syntax show mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering } Parameter dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry. By default all the entries are displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of all address entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table 26.9 clear mac address-table Description The show mac address-table command is used to clear the specified address entries. Syntax clear mac address-table { dynamic | static | filtering } Parameter dynamic | static | filtering —— The type of your desired entry. 218 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the information of all static address entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear mac address-table static 26.10 show mac address-table aging-time Description The show mac address-table aging-time command is used to display the Aging Time of the MAC address. Syntax show mac address-table aging-time Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the Aging Time of the MAC address: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table aging-time 219 26.11 show mac address-table max-mac-count Description The show mac address-table max-mac-count interface gigabitEthernet command is used to display the security configuration of all ports or the specified port. Syntax show mac address-table max-mac-count { all | interface gigabitEthernet port } Parameter all —— Displays the security information of all the Ethernet ports. port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the security configuration of all ports: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count all Display the security configuration of port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table max-mac-count interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 26.12 show mac address-table interface Description The show mac address-table interface command is used to display the address configuration of the specified port/port channel. 220 Syntax show mac address-table interface { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id } Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the address configuration of port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 26.13 show mac address-table count Description The show mac address-table count command is used to display the total amount of MAC address table. Syntax show mac address-table count [ vlan vlan-id ] Parameter vlan-id —— Specify the VLAN which the MAC entries belong to. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 221 Example Display the total MAC entry information in different VLANs: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table count 26.14 show mac address-table address Description The show mac address-table address command is used to display the information of the specified MAC address. Syntax show mac address-table address mac-addr [ interface { gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id } | vid vlan-id ] Parameter mac-addr ——The specified MAC address. port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. vlan-id —— Specify the VLAN which the entry belongs to. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of the MAC address 00:00:00:00:23:00 in VLAN 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show mac address-table address 00:00:00:00:23:00 vid 1 222 26.15 show mac address-table vlan Description The show mac address-table vlan command is used to display the MAC address configuration of the specified vlan. Syntax show mac address-table vlan vid Parameter vid ——The specified VLAN id. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the MAC address configuration of vlan 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table vlan 1 26.16 show mac address-table notification Description The show mac address-table notification command is used to display the MAC notificaiton configuration globally or on the specified port. Syntax show mac address-table notification { all | interface gigabitEthernet port } Parameter all —— Displays the notificaiton information globally and of all the Ethernet ports. port —— Displays the notification information on the specified port. 223 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the notificaiton configuration of all the ports: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table notification all 26.17 show mac address-table security Description The show mac address-table security command is used to display the MAC address security configuration globally or of the specified VLAN. Syntax show mac address-table security [ vid vid ] Parameter vid ——The specified VLAN id. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the MAC address security configuration of VLAN 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show mac address-table security vid 1 224 Chapter 27 System Configuration Commands System Commands can be used to configure the System information and System IP, reboot and reset the switch, upgrade the switch system and other operations. 27.1 system-time manual Description The system-time manual command is used to configure the system time manually. Syntax system-time manual time Parameter time —— Set the date and time manually, MM/DD/YYYY-HH:MM:SS. The valid value of the year ranges from 2000 to 2037. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the system mode as manual, and the time is 12/20/2010 17:30:35 T2600G-28TS(config)# system-time manual 12/20/2010-17:30:35 27.2 system-time ntp Description The system-time ntp command is used to configure the time zone and the IP address for the NTP Server. The switch will get UTC automatically if it has connected to an NTP Server. 225 Syntax system-time ntp { timezone } { ntp-server } { backup-ntp-server } { fetching-rate } Parameter timezone —— Your local time-zone, and it ranges from UTC-12:00 to UTC+13:00. The detailed information that each time-zone means are displayed as follow: UTC-12:00 —— TimeZone for International Date Line West. UTC-11:00 —— TimeZone for Coordinated Universal Time-11. UTC-10:00 —— TimeZone for Hawaii. UTC-09:00 —— TimeZone for Alaska. UTC-08:00 —— TimeZone for Pacific Time(US Canada). UTC-07:00 —— TimeZone for Mountain Time(US Canada). UTC-06:00 —— TimeZone for Central Time(US Canada). UTC-05:00 —— TimeZone for Eastern Time(US Canada). UTC-04:30 —— TimeZone for Caracas. UTC-04:00 —— TimeZone for Atlantic Time(Canada). UTC-03:30 —— TimeZone for Newfoundland. UTC-03:00 —— TimeZone for Buenos Aires, Salvador, Brasilia. UTC-02:00 —— TimeZone for Mid-Atlantic. UTC-01:00 —— TimeZone for Azores, Cape Verde Is. UTC —— TimeZone for Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London. UTC+01:00 —— TimeZone for Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna. UTC+02:00 —— TimeZone for Cairo, Athens, Bucharest, Amman, Beirut, Jerusalem. UTC+03:00 —— TimeZone for Kuwait, Riyadh, Baghdad. UTC+03:30 —— TimeZone for Tehran. 226 UTC+04:00 —— TimeZone for Moscow, St.Petersburg, Volgograd, Tbilisi, Port Louis. UTC+04:30 —— TimeZone for Kabul. UTC+05:00 —— TimeZone for Islamabad, Karachi, Tashkent. UTC+05:30 —— TimeZone for Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi. UTC+05:45 —— TimeZone for Kathmandu. UTC+06:00 —— TimeZone for Dhaka,Astana, Ekaterinburg. UTC+06:30 —— TimeZone for Yangon (Rangoon). UTC+07:00 —— TimeZone for Novosibrisk, Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta. UTC+08:00—— TimeZone for Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi, Singapore. UTC+09:00 —— TimeZone for Seoul, Irkutsk, Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo. UTC+09:30 —— TimeZone for Darwin, Adelaide. UTC+10:00 —— TimeZone for Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney, Brisbane. UTC+11:00 —— TimeZone for Solomon Is., New Caledonia, Vladivostok. UTC+12:00 —— TimeZone for Fiji, Magadan, Auckland, Welington. UTC+13:00 —— TimeZone for Nuku'alofa, Samoa. ntp-server —— The IP address for the Primary NTP Server. backup-ntp-server —— The IP address for the Secondary NTP Server. fetching-rate —— Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the system time mode as NTP, the time zone is UTC-12:00, the primary NTP server is 133.100.9.2 and the secondary NTP server is 139.78.100.163, the fetching-rate is 11 hours: 227 T2600G-28TS(config)# system-time ntp UTC-12:00 133.100.9.2 139.79.100.163 11 27.3 system-time dst predefined Description The system-time dst predefined command is used to select a daylight saving time configuration from the predefined mode. The configuration can be used recurrently. To disable DST function, use no system-time dst command. Syntax system-time dst predefined [ USA | Australia | Europe | New-Zealand ] no system-time dst Parameter USA | Australia | Europe | New-Zealand —— The mode of daylight saving time. There are 4 options which are USA, Australia, Europe and New-Zealand respectively. The default value is Europe. Following are the time ranges of each option: USA: Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in November, 02:00. Australia: First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April, 03:00. Europe: Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in October, 01:00. New Zealand: Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in April, 03:00. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the daylight saving time as USA standard: T2600G-28TS(config)#system-time dst predefined USA 228 27.4 system-time dst date Description The system-time dst date command is used to configure the one-off daylight saving time. The start date is in the current year by default. The time range of the daylight saving time must shorter than one year, but you can configure it spanning years. To disable DST function, use no system-time dst command. Syntax system-time dst date {smonth} {sday} {stime} {syear} {emonth} {eday} {etime} {eyear}[offset] no system-time dst Parameter smonth ——The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec. sday —— The start day of the daylight saving time, ranging from 1 to 31. Here you should show special attention to February and the differences between a solar month and a lunar month. stime —— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM. syear —— The start year of the daylight saving time. emonth —— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec. eday —— The end day of the daylight saving time, ranging from q to 31. Here you should show special attention to February and the differences between a solar month and a lunar month. etime —— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM. eyear —— The end year of the daylight saving time. offset —— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is 60 minutes by default. 229 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the daylight saving time from zero clock, Apr 1st to zero clock Oct 1st and the offset is 30 minutes in 2015: T2600G-28TS(config)# system-time dst date Apr 1 00:00 2015 Oct 1 00:00 2015 30 27.5 system-time dst recurring Description The system-time dst recurring command is used to configure the recurring daylight saving time. It can be configured spanning years. To disable DST function, use no system-time dst command. Syntax system-time dst recurring {sweek} {sday} {smonth} {stime} {eweek} {eday} {emonth} {etime} [offset] no system-time dst Parameter sweek——The start week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last. sday —— The start day of the daylight saving time. There are 7 values showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat. smonth —— The start month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as follows: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec. stime —— The start moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM. 230 eweek ——The end week of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: first, second, third, fourth, last. eday —— The end day of the daylight saving time. There are 5 values showing as follows: Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat. emonth —— The end month of the daylight saving time. There are 12 values showing as following: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec. etime —— The end moment of the daylight saving time, HH:MM. offset —— The number of minutes to add during the daylight saving time. It is 60 minutes by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the daylight saving time from 2:00am, the first Sunday of May to 2:00am, the last Sunday of Oct and the offset is 45 minutes: T2600G-28TS(config)# system-time dst recurring first Sun May 02:00 last Sun Oct 02:00 45 27.6 hostname Description The hostname command is used to configure the system name. To clear the system name information, use no hostname command. Syntax hostname [ hostname ] no hostname 231 Parameter hostname —— System Name. The length of the name ranges from 1 to 32 characters. By default, it is the device name, for example “T2600G-28TS”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the system name as TPLINK: T2600G-28TS(config)# hostname TPLINK 27.7 location Description The location command is used to configure the system location. To clear the system location information, use no location command. Syntax location [ location ] no location Parameter location —— Device Location. It consists of 32 characters at most. It is “SHENZHEN” by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 232 Example Configure the system location as SHENZHEN: T2600G-28TS(config)# location SHENSHEN 27.8 contact-info Description The contact-info command is used to configure the system contact information. To clear the system contact information, use no contact-info command. Syntax contact-info [ contact_info ] no contact-info Parameter contact_info —— Contact Information. It consists of 32 characters at most. It is “www.tp-link.com” by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the system contact information as www.tp-link.com: T2600G-28TS(config)# contact-info www.tp-link.com 233 27.9 ip address Description This ip address command is used to configure the IP address and IP subnet mask for the specified interface manually. The interface type includes: routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface. Syntax ip address { ip-addr } { mask } [ secondary ] no ip address [ ip-addr ] [ mask ] Parameter ip-addr —— The IP address of the Layer 3 interface. mask —— The subnet mask of the Layer 3 interface. secondary —— Specify the interface’s secondary IP address. If this parameter is omitted here, the configured IP address is the interface’s primary address. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the VLAN interface 2 with the primary IP address as 192.168.1.1/24 and secondary IP address as 192.168.2.1/24: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 secondary 234 27.10 ip address-alloc Description The IP address-alloc command is used to enable the DHCP Client function or the BOOTP Protocol. When this function is enabled, the specified interface will obtain IP from DHCP Server or BOOTP server. To disable the IP obtaining function on the specified interface, use the no ip address command. This command applies to the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface. Syntax ip address-alloc { dhcp | bootp } no ip address Parameter dhcp —— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the DHCP Server. bootp —— Specify the Layer 3 interface to obtain IP address from the BOOTP Server. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DHCP Client function on the Lay 3 routed port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip address-alloc dhcp Disable the IP address obtaining function on the VLAN interface 2: 235 T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no ip address 27.11 reset Description The reset command is used to reset the switch’s software. After resetting, all configuration of the switch will restore to the factory defaults and your current settings will be lost. Syntax reset Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Reset the software of the switch: T2600G-28TS# reset 27.12 reboot Description The reboot command is used to reboot the Switch. To avoid damage, don’t turn off the device while rebooting. Syntax reboot Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode 236 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Reboot the switch: T2600G-28TS# reboot 27.13 reboot-schedule Description This reboot-schedule command is used to configure the switch to reboot at a certain time point. To delete the reboot schedule settings, use the reboot-schedule cancel command. Syntax reboot-schedule at time [ date ] [ save_before_reboot ] reboot-schedule in interval [ save_before_reboot ] reboot-schedule cancel Parameter time —— Specify the time point for the switch to reboot, in the format of hh:mm. date —— Specify the date for the switch to reboot, in the format of DD:MM:YYYY. The date should be within 30 days. save_before_reboot —— Save the configuration file before the switch reboots. interval —— Specify a time period after which the switch reboots. It ranges from 1 to 43200 minutes. cancel —— Delete the reboot schedule settings. 237 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines In the command reboot-schedule at time [ date ] [ save_before_reboot ], if no date is specified and the time you set here is later than the time that this command is executed, the switch will reboot later that day; otherwise the switch will reboot at the time point the next day. Example Specify the switch to save the configuration files and reboot in 200 minutes,: T2600G-28TS(config)# reboot-schedule in 200 save_before_reboot 27.14 copy running-config startup-config Description The copy running-config startup-config command is used to save the current settings. Syntax copy running-config startup-config Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Save current settings: T2600G-28TS# copy running-config startup-config 238 27.15 copy startup-config tftp Description The copy startup-config tftp command is used to backup the configuration file to TFTP server. Syntax copy startup-config tftp ip-address ip-addr filename name Parameter ip-addr —— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. name —— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be backup. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148 and name this file config.cfg: T2600G-28TS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config Backup the configuration files to TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234 and name this file config.cfg: T2600G-28TS# copy startup-config tftp ip-address fe80::1234 filename config 239 27.16 copy tftp startup-config Description The copy tftp startup-config command is used to download the configuration file to the switch from TFTP server. Syntax copy tftp startup-config ip-address ip-addr filename name Parameter ip-addr —— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. name —— Specify the name for the configuration file which would be downloaded. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP server with the IP 192.168.0.148: T2600G-28TS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename config Download the configuration file named as config.cfg to the switch from TFTP server with the IP fe80::1234 T2600G-28TS# copy tftp startup-config ip-address fe80::1234 filename config 240 27.17 boot application Description The boot application command is used to configure the image file as startup image or backup image. Syntax boot application filename { image1 | image 2 } { startup | backup } no boot application Parameter image1 | image2 —— Specify the image file to be configured. By default, the image1.bin is the startup image and the image2.bin is the backup image. startup | backup —— Specify the property of the image, either startup image or backup image. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the image2.bin as the startup image: T2600G-28TS(config)# boot application filename image2 startup 27.18 remove backup-image Description The remove backup-image command is used to delete the backup-image. Syntax remove backup-image 241 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Delete the backup image file: T2600G-28TS# remove backup-image 27.19 firmware upgrade Description The firmware upgrade command is used to upgrade the switch’s backup image file via the TFTP server. The uploaded firmware file will take place of the Backup Image, and user can chose whether to reboot the switch will the Backup Image. Syntax firmware upgrade ip-address ip-addr filename name Parameter ip-addr —— IP Address of the TFTP server. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.1 or fe80::1234. name —— Specify the name for the firmware file. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 242 Example Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP server with the IP address 192.168.0.148, and reboot the switch with this firmware: T2600G-28TS# firmware upgrade ip-address 192.168.0.148 filename firmware.bin It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y Operation OK! Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): y Upgrade the switch’s backup iamge file with the file firmware.bin in the TFTP server with the IP address fe80::1234, but do not reboot the switch: T2600G-28TS# firmware upgrade ip-address fe80::1234 filename firmware.bin It will only upgrade the backup image. Continue? (Y/N):y Operation OK! Reboot with the backup image? (Y/N): n 27.20 boot autoinstall start Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The boot autoinstall start command is used to start Auto Install function. To stop the Auto Install function, use no boot autoinstall start. Syntax boot autoinstall start no boot autoinstall start 243 Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Start Auto Install function: T2600-18TS(config)# boot autoinstall start 27.21 boot autoinstall persistent-mode Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The boot autoinstall persistent-mode command is used to start Auto Install function to next reboot cycle. To diable persistent mode use no boot autoinstall persistent-mode. Syntax boot autoinstall persistent-mode no boot autoinstall persistent-mode Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Start Auto Install function: T2600-18TS(config)# boot autoinstall persistent-mode 244 27.22 boot autoinstall auto-save Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The boot autoinstall auto-save command is used to automatically save the new configuration file that was downloaded by Auto Install function to start-up configuration file Auto Install. To disable auto-save configuration feature use no boot autoinstall auto-save. Syntax boot autoinstall auto-save no boot autoinstall auto-save Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Auto Install function to auto-save new configuration file to start-up configuration file: T2600-18TS(config)# boot autoinstall auto-save 27.23 boot autoinstall auto-reboot Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The boot autoinstall auto-reboot command is used to automatically reboot the switch after Auto Install function is completed successfully. To disable auto-reboot feature use no boot autoinstall auto-reboot. 245 Syntax boot autoinstall auto-reboot no boot autoinstall auto-reboot Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the switch to auto reboot after Auto Install function completed successfully: T2600-18TS(config)# boot autoinstall auto-reboot 27.24 boot autoinstall retry-count Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The boot autoinstall retry-count command is used to configure retry count when Auto Install function uses TFTP to download configuration files in a cycle of Auto Install process. To set retry count to default value use no boot autoinstall retry-count. Syntax boot autoinstall retry-count count no boot autoinstall retry-count Parameter count —— The count of retrying auto install. The value ranges from 1 to 3. 246 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure TFTP retry 2 times when download files failed: T2600-18TS(config)# boot autoinstall retry-count 2 27.25 show boot autoinstall Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The show boot autoinstall command is used to display the configuration of Auto Install function. Syntax show boot autoinstall Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of Auto Install function: T2600-18TS# show boot autoinstall 27.26 show boot autoinstall downloaded-config Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. 247 Description The show boot autoinstall downloaded-config command is used to display the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install. Syntax show boot autoinstall downloaded-config Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration file which downloaded by Auto Install: T2600-18TS# show boot autoinstall downloaded-config 27.27 ping Description The ping command is used to test the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network. Syntax ping [ ip | ipv6 ] { ip_addr } [ -n count ] [ -l count ] [ -i count ] Parameter ip —— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv4. ipv6 —— The type of the IP address for ping test should be IPv6. ip_addr —— The IP address of the destination node for ping test. If the parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234. -n count —— The amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. It ranges from 1 to 10. By default, this value is 4. 248 -l count —— The size of the sending data during ping testing. It ranges from 1 to 1500 bytes. By default, this value is 64. -i count —— The interval to send ICMP request packets. It ranges from 100 to 1000 milliseconds. By default, this value is 1000. Command Mode User EXEC Mode and Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP 192.168.0.131, specify the count (-l) as 512 bytes and count (-i) as 1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish: T2600G-28TS# ping 192.168.0.131 –n 8 –l 512 To test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP fe80::1234, specify the count (-l) as 512 bytes and count (-i) as 1000 milliseconds. If there is not any response after 8 times’ Ping test, the connection between the switch and the network device is failed to establish: T2600G-28TS# ping fe80::1234 –n 8 –l 512 27.28 tracert Description The tracert command is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the source to destination of the test data. Syntax tracert [ ip | ipv6 ] ip_addr [ maxHops ] Parameter ip —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv4. 249 ipv6 —— The type of the IP address for tracert test should be IPv6. ip_addr —— The IP address of the destination device. If the parameter ip/ipv6 is not selected, both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234. maxHops —— The maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass though. It ranges from 1 to 30. By default, this value is 4. Command Mode User EXEC Mode and Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP 192.168.0.131. If the destination device has not been found after 20 maxHops, the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to establish: T2600G-28TS# tracert 192.168.0.131 20 Test the connectivity between the switch and the network device with the IP fe80::1234. If the destination device has not been found after 20 maxHops, the connection between the switch and the destination device is failed to establish: T2600G-28TS# tracert fe80::1234 20 27.29 show system-info Description The show system-info command is used to display System Description, System Name, System Location, Contact Information, Hardware Version, Software Version, Bootloader Version, Mac Address, System Time, Run Time and so on. 250 Syntax show system-info Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the system information: T2600G-28TS# show system-info 27.30 show system-info interface Description The show system-info interface command is used to display the utilization of the connected Ethernet port. Syntax show system-info interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the utilization of port 18: T2600G-28TS# show system-info interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/18 251 27.31 show image-info Description The show imsage-info command is used to display the information of image files in the system. Syntax show image-info Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the system image files’ information: T2600G-28TS# show image-info 27.32 show boot Description The show boot command is used to display the boot configuration of the system. Syntax show boot Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 252 Example Display the system boot configuration information: T2600G-28TS# show boot 27.33 show running-config Description The show running-config command is used to display the current operating configurations of the system or of a specified port. Syntax show running-config [ all ] Parameter all —— Displays all the current operating configurations. Without this option, only the configurations that differ from the default value will be displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configurations that differ from the default value: T2600G-28TS# show running-config 27.34 show running-config | Description The show running-config | command is used to filter the output information with the keyword you specify. “|” is a separator indicating the information will be filtered. 253 Syntax show running-config | { [exclude exclude-keyword ] [ include include-keyword } ] Parameter exclude-keyword —— The operating configuration excluding this keyword wil be displayed. include-keyword —— The operating configuration including this keyword wil be displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the operating configuration that includes the “vlan” keyword: T2600G-28TS# show running-config | include vlan 27.35 show startup-config Description The show startup-config command is used to display the current configuration saved in the switch. These configuration settings will not be lost the next time you reboot the switch. Syntax show startup-config Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 254 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the saved configuration: T2600G-28TS# show startup-config 27.36 show system-time Description The show system-time command is used to display the time information of the switch. Syntax show system-time Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the time information of the switch T2600G-28TS# show system-time 27.37 show system-time dst Description The show system-time dst command is used to display the DST time information of the switch. Syntax show system-time dst 255 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DST time information of the switch T2600G-28TS# show system-time dst 27.38 show system-time ntp Description The show system-time ntp command is used to display the NTP mode configuration information. Syntax show system-time ntp Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the NTP mode configuration information of the switch: T2600G-28TS# show system-time ntp 256 27.39 show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet Description The show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet command is used to display the cable diagnostics of the connected Ethernet Port, which facilitates you to check the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network. Syntax show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet port Parameter port —— The number of the port which is selected for Cable test. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3: T2600G-28TS# show cable-diagnostics interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 27.40 show cable-diagnostics careful interface Description The show cable-diagnostics careful interface gigabitEthernet command is used to display the connection status of the cable connected to the switch. When taking the careful cable test, the switch will only test the cable for the port which is in the link-down status. 257 Syntax show cable-diagnostics careful interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The number of the port which is selected for Cable test. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Show the cable-diagnostics of port 3: T2600G-28TS# show cable-diagnostics careful interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 27.41 show cpu-utilization Description The show cpu-utilization command is used to display the system’s CPU utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes. Syntax show cpu-utilization Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the CPU utilization information of the switch: 258 T2600G-28TS# show cpu-utilization 27.42 show memory-utilization Description The show memory-utilization command is used to display the system’s memory utilization in the last 5 seconds/1minute/5minutes. Syntax show memory-utilization Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the memory utilization information of the switch: T2600G-28TS# show memory-utilization 259 Chapter 28 IPv6 Address Configuration Commands The IPv6 address configuration commands are provided in the Interface Configuration Mode, which includes the routed port, the port-channel interface and the VLAN interface. Enter the configuration mode of these Layer 3 interfaces and configure their IPv6 parameters. 28.1 ipv6 enable Description This command is used to enable the IPv6 function on the speicified Layer 3 interface. IPv6 function should be enabled before the IPv6 address configuration management. By default it is enabled on VLAN interface 1. IPv6 function can only be enabled on one Layer 3 interface at a time. If the IPv6 function is disabled, the corresponding IPv6 netstack and IPv6-based modules will be invalid, for example SSHv6, SSLv6, TFTPv6 etc. To disable the IPv6 function, use no ipv6 enable command. Syntax ipv6 enable no ipv6 enable Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IPv6 function on the VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 enable 260 28.2 ipv6 address autoconfig Description This command is used to enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address. The switch has only one ipv6 link-local address, which can be configured automatically or manually. The general ipv6 link-local address has the prefix as fe80::/10. IPv6 routers cannot forward packets that have link-local source or destination addresses to other links. The autuconfigured ipv6 link-local address is in EUI-64 format. To verify the uniqueness of the link-local address, the manually configured ipv6 link-local address will be deleted when the autoconfigured ipv6 link-local address takes effect. Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the automatic configuration of the ipv6 link-local address on VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig 28.3 ipv6 address link-local Description The ipv6 address link-local command is used to configure the ipv6 link-local address manually on a specified interface. To delete the configured link-local address, use no ipv6 address link-local command. Syntax ipv6 address ipv6-addr link-local no ipv6 address ipv6-addr link-local 261 Parameter ipv6-addr —— The link-local address of the interface. It should be a standardized IPv6 address with the prefix fe80::/10, otherwise this command will be invalid. Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the link-local address as fe80::1234 on the VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address fe80::1234 link-local 28.4 ipv6 address dhcp Description The ipv6 address dhcp command is used to enable the DHCPv6 Client function. When this function is enabled, the Layer 3 interface will try to obtain IP from DHCPv6 server. To delete the allocated IP from DHCPv6 server and disable the DHCPv6 Client function, use no ipv6 address dhcp command. Syntax ipv6 address dhcp no ipv6 address dhcp Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 262 Example Enable the DHCP Client function on VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address dhcp 28.5 ipv6 address ra Description This command is used to configure the interface’s global IPv6 address according to the address prefix and other configuration parameters from its received RA(Router Advertisement) message. To disable this function, use no ipv6 address ra command. Syntax ipv6 address ra no ipv6 address ra Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the automatic ipv6 address configuration function to obtain IPv6 address through the RA message on VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address ra 263 28.6 ipv6 address eui-64 Description This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address with an extended unique identifier (EUI) in the low-order 64 bits on the interface. Specify only the network prefix. The last 64 bits are automatically computed from the switch MAC address. To remove an EUI-64 IPv6 address from the interface, use the no ipv6 address eui-64 command. Syntax ipv6 address ipv6-addr eui-64 no ipv6 address ipv6-addr eui-64 Parameter ipv6-addr —— Global IPv6 address with 64 bits network prefix, for example 3ffe::/64. Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure an EUI-64 global address on the interface with the network prefix 3ffe::/64: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3ffe::/64 eui-64 264 28.7 ipv6 address Description This command is used to manually configure a global IPv6 address on the interface. To remove a global IPv6 address from the interface, use no ipv6 address command. Syntax ipv6 address ipv6-addr no ipv6 address ipv6-addr Parameter ipv6-addr —— Global IPv6 address with network prefix, for example 3ffe::1/64. Configuration Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the global address 3001::1/64 on VLAN interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 address 3001::1/64 28.8 show ipv6 interface Description This command is used to display the configured ipv6 information of the management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and global address, ipv6 multicast groups etc. Syntax show ipv6 interface 265 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the ipv6 information of the management interface: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 interface 266 Chapter 29 Ethernet Configuration Commands Ethernet Configuration Commands can be used to configure the Bandwidth Control, Negotiation Mode and Storm Control for Ethernet ports. 29.1 interface gigabitEthernet Description The interface gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure the corresponding Gigabit Ethernet port. Syntax interface gigabitEthernet port Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example To enter the Interface gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 267 29.2 interface range gigabitEthernet Description The interface range gigabitEthernet command is used to enter the interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode and configure multiple Gigabit Ethernet ports at the same time. Syntax interface range gigabitEthernet port-list Parameter port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines Command in the Interface Range gigabitEthernet Mode is executed independently on all ports in the range. It does not affect the execution on the other ports at all if the command results in an error on one port. Example To enter the Interface range gigabitEthernet Configuration Mode, and configure ports 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 9 at the same time by adding them to one port-list: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3,1/0/6-7,1/0/9 268 29.3 description Description The description command is used to add a description to the Ethernet port. To clear the description of the corresponding port, use no description command. Syntax description string no description Parameter string —— Content of a port description, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a description Port_5 to port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# description Port_5 29.4 shutdown Description The shutdown command is used to disable an Ethernet port. To enable this port again, use no shutdown command. 269 Syntax shutdown no shutdown Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Disable port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# shutdown 29.5 flow-control Description The flow-control command is used to enable the flow-control function for a port. To disable the flow-control function for this corresponding port, use no flow-control command. With the flow-control function enabled, the Ingress Rate and Egress Rate can be synchronized to avoid packet loss in the network. Syntax flow-control no flow-control Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 270 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the flow-control function for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# flow-control 29.6 duplex Description The duplex command is used to configure the Duplex Mode for an Ethernet port. To return to the default configuration, use no duplex command. Syntax duplex { auto | full | half } no duplex Parameter auto | full | half —— The duplex mode of the Ethernet port. There are three options: auto-negotiation mode, full-duplex mode and half-duplex mode. By default the Gigabit Ethernet port is auto-negotiation mode. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Duplex Mode as full-duplex for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 271 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# duplex full 29.7 jumbo Description The jumbo command is used to allow the jumbo frame to pass through this port. To disable this feature, use no jumbo command. This feature is disabled by default. Syntax jumbo no jumbo Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Allow jumbo frame on port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# jumbo 29.8 jumbo-size Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The jumbo-size command is used to specify the size of jumbo frames. 272 Syntax jumbo-size size Parameter size —— The value of jumbo frames. It ranges from 1518 to 9216 bytes, and the default is 1518 bytes. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Globally configure the size of jumbo frames as 9216: T2600G-18TS(config)# jumbo-size 9216 29.9 speed Description The speed command is used to configure the Speed Mode for an Ethernet port. To return to the default configuration, use no speed command. Syntax speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto } no speed Parameter 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto —— The speed mode of the Ethernet port. There are four options: 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and Auto negotiation mode (default). 273 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the Speed Mode as 100Mbps for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# speed 100 29.10 downspeed enable Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The downspeed enable command is used to enable auto negotiation for 100Mbps port speed, if negotiation for 1000Mbps port speed failed. To disable this function ,use downspeed disable. Syntax downspeed enable downspeed disable Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 274 Example Enable downspeed for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# downspeed enable 29.11 storm-control pps Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. Description The storm-control pps command is used to configure the storm control mode as pps(packets per second) on an interface. To disable the pps mode, Syntax use no storm-control pps command. storm-control pps no storm-control pps Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines This command should be used along with the storm-control command to enable the storm control function and specify the detailed parameters in pps mode. Example Set the storm control mode as pps on port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control pps 275 29.12 storm-control Description The storm-control command is used to enable the broadcast, multicast, or unicast strom control function and to set threshold levels on an interface. To Syntax disable the storm control function, use no storm-control command. storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast } { kbps | ratio | pps } { rate } no storm-control { broadcast | multicast | unicast } Parameter broadcast | multicast | unicast —— Enable broadcast/multicast/unicast storm control on the interface. kbps | ratio | pps —— Specify the storm control type. kbps: Specify the threshold in kbits per second. ratio: Specify the threshold as a percentage of the bandwidth. pps: Specify the threshold in packets per second. rate —— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. The specified type of packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded. For kbps, the rate ranges from 1 to 1000000 kbps. For ratio, the rate ranges from 1 to 100 percent. For pps, the rate ranges from 1 to 1488000 packets per second. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines Before you configure the storm-control type as kbps or ratio, pelease ensure that the port is not in pps mode. Example Configure the broadcast storm control rate as 1000 kbps on port 1/0/5: 276 T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# storm-control broadcast kbps 1000 29.13 bandwidth Description The bandwidth command is used to configure the bandwidth limit for an Ethernet port. To disable the bandwidth limit, use no bandwidth command. Syntax bandwidth {[ ingress ingress-rate ] [ egress egress-rate ]} no bandwidth { all | ingress | egress } Parameter ingress-rate —— Specify the bandwidth for receiving packets. Range: 1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport. egress-rate —— Specify the bandwidth for sending packets. Range: 1-1000000Kbps for the gigaport. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the ingress-rate as 5120Kbps and egress-rate as 1024Kbps for port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# bandwidth ingress 5120 egress 1024 277 29.14 clear counters Description The clear counters command is used to clear the statistics information of all the Ethernet ports and port channels. Syntax clear counters clear counters interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the statistic information of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear counters 29.15 show interface status Description The show interface status command is used to display the connection status of the Ethernet port/port channel. Syntax show interface port-channel-id ] status [ 278 gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel.. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the connection status of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface status Display the connection status of port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface status gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 29.16 show interface counters Description The show interface counters command is used to display the statistics information of all ports/port channels. Syntax show interface counters [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 279 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the statistics information of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface counters Display the statistics information of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface counters gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 29.17 show interface configuration Description The show interface configuration command is used to display the configurations of all ports and port channels, including Port-status, Flow Control, Negotiation Mode and Port-description. Syntax show interface configuration [ gigabitEthernet port ] [ port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configurations of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface configuration Display the configurations of port 1/0/2: 280 T2600G-28TS(config)# show interface configuration gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 29.18 show storm-control Description The show storm-control command is used to display the storm-control information of Ethernet ports. Syntax show storm-control interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list ] [ port-channel port-channel-id-list ] Parameter port-list ——The list of Ethernet ports. port-channel-id-list —— The list of port channels. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the storm-control information of port 4, 5, 6, and 7: T2600G-28TS(config)# show storm-control interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4-7 29.19 show bandwidth Description The show bandwidth command is used to display the bandwidth-limit information of Ethernet ports. 281 Syntax show bandwidth interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list ] [ port-channel port-channel-id-list ] Parameter port-list ——The list of Ethernet ports. port-channel-id-list —— The list of port channels. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the bandwidth-limit information of port 1/0/4: T2600G-28TS(config)# show bandwidth interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 282 Chapter 30 QoS Commands QoS (Quality of Service) function is used to optimize the network performance. It provides you with network service experience of a better quality. 30.1 qos (For T2600G-18TS only) Description The qos command is used to configure CoS (Class of Service) based on port. To return to the default configuration, use no qos command. Syntax qos tc-id no qos Parameter tc-id —— The priority of port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent TC0-TC7 respectively. By default, the priority is 0. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines Port priority is one property of the port. When the port priority is specified, the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the tc value of the current port. Example Configure the priority of port 5 as 3: 283 T2600G-18TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-18TS(config-if)# qos 3 30.2 qos (For T2600G-52TS only) Description The qos command is used to configure CoS (Class of Service) based on port. To return to the default configuration, use no qos command. Syntax qos cos-id no qos Parameter cos-id —— The priority of port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent CoS0-CoS7 respectively. By default, the priority is 0. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines Port priority is one property of the port. When the port priority is specified, the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the CoS value of the ingress port and the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in IEEE 802.1P. Example Configure the priority of port 5 as 3: T2600G-52TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-52TS(config-if)# qos 3 284 30.3 qos port-priority Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos port-priority command is used to configure priority level based on port. To return to the default configuration, use no qos port-priority command. Syntax qos port-priority dot1p-priority no qos port-priority Parameter dot1p-priority—— The priority of port. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represent CoS0-CoS7 respectively. By default, the priority is 0. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines Port priority is one property of the port. When the port priority is specified, the data will be classified into the egress queue based on the CoS value of the ingress port and the mapping relation between the CoS and TC in IEEE 802.1P. Example Configure the priority of port 5 as 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos port-priority 3 285 30.4 qos trust mode Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos trust mode command is used to configure qos trust-mode for ports. Packets are mapped to different priority levels in three modes. Syntax qos trust mode { untrust | dot1p | dscp } Parameter untrust—— In untrust mode, packets are mapped to different priority levels based on the port priority. dot1p——In dot1p mode, packets with VLAN tag will be processed according to the 802.1p priority configuration, and packets without VLAN tag will be processed according to the port priority. dscp——In dscp mode, IP packets will be processed according to the dscp priority configuration, and other packets will be processed according to the port priority. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the trust-mode of port 2 as dot1p: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos trust mode dot1p 286 30.5 qos cos Note: Only T2600G-18TS supports this command. Description The qos cos command is used to enable the mapping relation between IEEE802.1P Priority and TC egress queue. To disable the mapping relation, use no qos cos command. Syntax qos cos no qos cos Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines IEEE 802.1P gives the Pri field in IEEE 802.1Q tag a recommended definition. When the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P Priority and TC egress queue is enabled, the data will be classified into the egress queue based on this mapping relation. Example Enable the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P Priority and egress queue: T2600G-18TS (config)# qos cos 30.6 qos dscp Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. 287 Description The qos dscp command is used to enable the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and CoS value. To disable the mapping relation, use no qos dscp command. Syntax qos dscp no qos dscp Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. DSCP priorities are mapped to the corresponding 802.1p priorities. IP datagram will be classified into the egress queue based on the mapping relation between DSCP priority and CoS value. Example Enable the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and CoS value: T2600G-52TS(config)# qos dscp 30.7 qos queue cos-map Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. Description The qos queue cos-map command is used to configure the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P priority tag/IEEE 802.1Q tag, CoS value and the TC egress queue. To return to the default configuration, use no qos queue cos-map command. When 802.1P Priority is enabled, the packets with 288 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority mode. The untagged packets are mapped based on port priority mode. Syntax qos queue cos-map { tag/cos-id } { tc-id } no qos queue cos-map Parameter tag/cos-id —— The 8 priority levels defined by IEEE 802.1P or the priority level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges from CoS 0 to CoS 7. tc-id —— The egress queue the packets with tag are mapped to. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represents TC0 toTC7 respectively. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines 1. By default, the mapping relation between tag/cos and the egress queue is: 0/CoS 0-TC1, 1/CoS 1-TC0, 2/CoS 2-TC2, 3/CoS 3-TC3, 4/CoS 4-TC4, 5/CoS 5-TC5, 6/CoS 6-TC6, 7/CoS 7-TC7. 2. Among the priority levels TC0-TC7, the bigger value, the higher priority. Example Map CoS 5 to TC 2: T2600G-52TS(config)# qos queue cos-map 5 2 289 30.8 qos cos-map Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos cos-map command is used to configure the mapping relation between IEEE 802.1P priority and the TC egress queue. To return to the default configuration, use no qos cos-map command. The dscp mapping priority level, the 802.1p remapping priority level, and port priority level are all mapped to TC egress queue based on qos cos-map finally. Syntax qos cos-map { dot1p-priority } {tc-queue} no qos cos-map Parameter dot1p-priority —— The 8 priority levels defined by IEEE 802.1P or the priority level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges from 0 to 7. tc-queue—— The egress queue the packets with tag are mapped to. It ranges from 0 to 7, which represents TC0 toTC7 respectively. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines 1. By default, the mapping relation between tag/cos and the egress queue is: 0/CoS 0-TC1, 1/CoS 1-TC0, 2/CoS 2-TC2, 3/CoS 3-TC3, 4/CoS 4-TC4, 5/CoS 5-TC5, 6/CoS 6-TC6, 7/CoS 7-TC7. 2. Among the priority levels TC0-TC7, the bigger value, the higher priority. 290 Example Map CoS 5 to TC 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# qos cos-map 5 2 30.9 qos dot1p-remap Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos dot1p-remap command is used to configure the 802.1P Priority Remapping relation for ports. The 802.1p priority value of ingress packets will be remapped to a new one. To return to the default configuration, use no qos dot1p-remap command. Syntax qos dot1p-remap {dot1p-priority} {new-dot1p-priority} no qos dot1p-remap Parameter dot1p-priority ——802.1p priority value. new-dot1p-priority ——A new 802.1p priority value. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default, the 802.1p priority remapping relation maps the 802,1p priority value to itself. 291 Example Remap 802,1p priority value 1 to 2 on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos dot1p-remap 1 2 30.10 qos queue dscp-map (For T2600G-18TS only) Description The qos queue dscp-map command is used to configure the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and the CoS value. To return to the default configuration, use no qos queue dscp-map command. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority mode; non-IP datagram with IEEE 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on IEEE 802.1P priority mode if IEEE 802.1P Priority is enabled; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode. Syntax qos queue dscp-map { dscp-list } { tc-id } no qos queue dscp-map Parameter dscp-list —— List of DSCP value. One or several DSCP values can be typed using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance, 1,4-7,11 indicates choosing 1,4,5,6,7,11. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63. tc-id —— The priority level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges from TC 0 to TC 7. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 292 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default, the mapping relation between DSCP value and the egress queue is: (0-7)-TC 0, (8-15)-TC 1, (16-23)-TC 2, (24-31)-TC 3, (32-39)-TC 4, (40-47)-TC 5, (48-55)-TC 6, (56-63)-TC 7. Example Map DSCP values 10-12 to TC 2: T2600G-18TS(config)# qos queue dscp-map 10-12 2 30.11 qos queue dscp-map (For T2600G-52TS only) Description The qos queue dscp-map command is used to configure the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and the CoS value. To return to the default configuration, use no qos queue dscp-map command. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority mode; non-IP datagram with IEEE 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on IEEE 802.1P priority mode if IEEE 802.1P Priority is enabled; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode. Syntax qos queue dscp-map { dscp-list } { cos-id } no qos queue dscp-map Parameter dscp-list —— List of DSCP value. One or several DSCP values can be typed using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for 293 instance, 1,4-7,11 indicates choosing 1,4,5,6,7,11. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63. cos-id —— The priority level the packets with tag are mapped to, which ranges from CoS 0 to CoS 7. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default, the mapping relation between DSCP value and the CoS value is: (0-7)-CoS 0, (8-15)-CoS 1, (16-23)-CoS 2, (24-31)-CoS 3, (32-39)-CoS 4, (40-47)-CoS 5, (48-55)-CoS 6, (56-63)-CoS 7. Example Map DSCP values 10-12 to CoS 2: T2600G-52TS(config)# qos queue dscp-map 10-12 2 30.12 qos dscp-map Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos dscp-map command is used to configure the mapping relation between DSCP Priority and the CoS value for ports. To return to the default configuration, use no qos dscp-map command. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels. Syntax qos dscp-map {dscp-value-list} {dot1p-priority} 294 no qos dscp-map Parameter dscp-value-list —— List of DSCP value. One or several DSCP values can be typed using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance, 1,4-7,11 indicates choosing 1,4,5,6,7,11. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63. dot1p-priority —— The priority level the packets are mapped to, which ranges from CoS 0 to CoS 7. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default, the mapping relation between DSCP value and the CoS value is: (0-7)-CoS 0, (8-15)-CoS 1, (16-23)-CoS 2, (24-31)-CoS 3, (32-39)-CoS 4, (40-47)-CoS 5, (48-55)-CoS 6, (56-63)-CoS 7. Example Map DSCP values 10-12 to CoS 2 on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos dscp-map 10-12 2 30.13 qos dscp-remap Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The qos dscp-remap command is used to configure the dscp remapping relation for ports. The dscp value of ingress packets will be remapped to a 295 new dscp value. To return to the default configuration, use no qos dscp-remap command. Syntax qos dscp-remap {dscp-value-list} {new-dscp-value} no qos dscp-remap Parameter dscp-value-list —— List of DSCP value. One or several DSCP values can be typed using comma to separate. Use a hyphen to designate a range of values, for instance, 1,4-7,11 indicates choosing 1,4,5,6,7,11. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63. new-dscp-value ——A new DSCP value. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default, the DSCP remapping relation maps the DSCP value to itself. Example Remap DSCP values 10-12 to 2 on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# qos dscp-remap 10-12 2 30.14 qos queue mode Description The qos queue mode command is used to configure the Schedule Mode. To return to the default Equal-Mode, use no qos queue mode command. When 296 the network is congested, the program that many packets complete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0, TC1,TC2 … TC7. Syntax qos queue mode { sp | wrr | spwrr | equ } no qos queue mode Parameter sp —— Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty. wrr —— Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue. The weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7 are customized in qos queue weight command and their default values are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 127 respectively. spwrr —— Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, the switch provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. SP group is processed prior to WRR group. Queues in SP group are scheduled strictly based on Strict-Priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as 0 are in the SP group; other queues, with none-zero weight value, belong to the WRR group and the weight value can be customized in qos queue weight command. The weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5 and TC6 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 respectively, while the value of TC7 is 0 and non-configurable. equ —— Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally. The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1:1:1:1:1 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 297 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the Schedule Mode as Weight Round Robin Mode: T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue mode wrr 30.15 qos queue weight Description The qos queue weight command is used to configure weight value of each queue after the Schedule Mode is specified as WRR or SP+WRR. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7. Syntax qos queue weight { tc-id } { weight-value } Parameter tc-id —— The ID of the TC queue, ranging from 0 to 7. weight-value —— Configure the weight value of the specified TC queue. When the schedule mode is specified as WRR, the weight value ranges from 1 to 127. The 8 queues will take up the bandwidth according to their ratio. The default values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5,TC6 and TC7 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 127 respectively. When the schedule mode is specified as SP+WRR, the weight value ranges from 0 to 127. TC7 and the queue with its weight value set as 0 are in the SP group; other queues, with none-zero weight value, belong to the WRR group. In this SP+WRR scheduling mode, the queues in the SP group is scheduled preferentially (TC6>TC5>TC4>TC3>TC2>TC1>TC0 in strict priority). When there is no packets to be sent in the SP group, the queues in the WRR group will be scheduled according to the weight value of each queue. The default 298 weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2, TC3, TC4, TC5 and TC6 are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 and 64 respectively, while the value of TC7 is 0 and non-configurable. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the Schedule Mode as Weight Round Robin Mode, with the weight values of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 as 4, 7, 15 and 24: T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue mode wrr T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue weight 0 4 T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue weight 1 7 T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue weight 2 15 T2600G-28TS(config)# qos queue weight 3 24 30.16 show qos interface Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. Description The show qos interface command is used to display the configuration of QoS based on port priority. Syntax show qos interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list ] [ port-channel lagid-list ] Parameter port-list ——The list of Ethernet ports. lagid-list —— The list of LAGs. 299 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of QoS for all ports and LAGs: T2600G-52TS# show qos interface Display the configuration of QoS for ports 1/0/1-4: T2600G-52TS# show qos interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4 30.17 show qos cos-map Description The show qos cos-map command is used to display the configuration of IEEE 802.1P Priority and the mapping relation between cos-id and tc-id. Syntax show qos cos-map Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of IEEE 802.1P Priority and the mapping relation between cos-id and tc-id: T2600G-28TS# show qos cos-map 300 30.18 show qos dot1p-remap interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The show qos dot1p-remap interface command is used to display IEEE 802.1p priority remapping configuration for ports. Syntax show qos dot1p-remap interface [ gigabitEthernet port-id | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port-id —— Specify the port number to show qos dscp-map configuration. port-channel-id —— Specify the port channel number to show qos dscp-map configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of IEEE 802.1p priority remapping for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show qos dot1p-remap interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 30.19 show qos dscp-map Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. Description The show qos dscp-map command is used to display the configuration of DSCP Priority. 301 Syntax show qos dscp-map Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of DSCP Priority: T2600G-18TS# show qos dscp-map 30.20 show qos dscp-map interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The show qos dscp-map interface command is used to display the configuration of DSCP Priority for ports. Syntax show qos dscp-map interface [gigabitEthernet port-id | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port-id —— Specify the port number to show qos dscp-map configuration. port-channel-id —— Specify the port channel number to show qos dscp-map configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 302 Example Display the configuration of DSCP Priority for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show qos dscp-map interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 30.21 show qos dscp-remap interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The show qos dscp-remap interface command is used to display the configuration of dscp-remap for ports. Syntax show qos dscp-remap interface [ gigabitEthernet port-id | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port-id —— Specify the port number to show qos dscp-map configuration. port-channel-id —— Specify the port channel number to show qos dscp-map configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of dscp remap for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show qos dscp-remap interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 303 30.22 show qos port-priority interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The show qos port-priority interface command is used to display the configuration of port-priority to cos-id mapping relation for ports. Syntax show qos port-priority interface [ gigabitEthernet port-id | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port-id —— Specify the port number to show qos dscp-map configuration. port-channel-id —— Specify the port channel number to show qos dscp-map configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of port-priority to cos-id mapping relation for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show qos port-priority interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 30.23 show qos trust-mode interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. 304 Description The show qos trust-mode interface command is used to display the configuration of qos trust-mode for ports. Syntax show qos trust-mode interface [ gigabitEthernet port-id | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port-id —— Specify the port number to show qos dscp-map configuration. port-channel-id —— Specify the port channel number to show qos dscp-map configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of trust-mode for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show qos trust-mode interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 30.24 show qos queue mode Description The show qos queue mode command is used to display the schedule rule of the egress queues. Syntax show qos queue mode Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 305 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the schedule rule of the egress queues: T2600G-28TS# show qos queue mode 30.25 show qos status Note: Only T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS support this command. Description The show qos status command is used to display the status of IEEE 802.1P priority and DSCP priority. Syntax show qos status Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the status of IEEE 802.1P priority and DSCP priority: T2600G-52TS# show qos status 306 Chapter 31 Port Mirror Commands Port Mirror refers to the process of forwarding copies of packets from one port to a monitoring port. Usually, the monitoring port is connected to data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the monitored packets for monitoring and troubleshooting the network. 31.1 monitor session destination interface Description The monitor session destination interface command is used to configure the monitoring port. Each monitor session has only one monitoring port. To change the monitoring port, use the monitor session destination interface command by changing the port value. The no monitor session command is used to delete the corresponding monitoring port or monitor session. Syntax monitor session session_num destination interface gigabitEthernet port no monitor session session_num destination interface gigabitEthernet port no monitor session session_num Parameter session_num —— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. port —— The monitoring port number. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Create monitor session 1 and configure port 1/0/1 as the monitoring port: 307 T2600G-28TS(config)# monitor session 1 destination interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Delete the monitoring port 1/0/2 from monitor session 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1 destination interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 Delete the monitor session 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1 31.2 monitor session source interface Description The monitor session source interface command is used to configure the monitored port. To delete the corresponding monitored port, use no monitor session source interface command. Syntax monitor session session_num source interface gigabitEthernet port-list mode no monitor session session_num source interface gigabitEthernet port-list mode Parameter session_num —— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. port-list —— List of monitored port. It is multi-optional. mode —— The monitor mode. There are three options: rx, tx and both. Rx (ingress monitoring mode), means the incoming packets received by the monitored port will be copied to the monitoring port. Tx (egress monitoring mode), indicates the outgoing packets sent by the monitored port will be copied to the monitoring port. Both (ingress and egress monitoring), presents the incoming packets received and the outgoing packets sent by the monitored port will both be copied to the monitoring port. 308 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines 1. The monitoring port is corresponding to current interface configuration mode. 2. Monitored ports number is not limited, but it can’t be the monitoring port at the same time. 3. Whether the monitoring port and monitored ports are in the same VLAN or not is not demanded strictly. 4. The monitoring port and monitored ports cannot be link-aggregation member. Example Create monitor session 1, then configure port 4, 5, 7 as monitored port and enable ingress monitoring: T2600G-28TS(config)# monitor session 1 source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4-5,1/0/7 rx Delete port 4 in monitor session 1 and its configuration: T2600G-28TS(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 rx 31.3 show monitor session Description The show monitor session command is used to display the configuration of port monitoring. 309 Syntax show monitor session [session_num] Parameter session_num —— The monitor session number, can only be specified as 1. It is optional. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the monitoring configuration of monitor session 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show monitor session 1 310 Chapter 32 Port Isolation Commands Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forwarding port list. 32.1 port isolation Description The port isolation command is used to configure the forward port/port channel list of a port/port channel, so that this port/port channel can only communicate with the ports/port channels on its list. To delete the corresponding configuration, use no port isolation command. Syntax port isolation { [ gi-forward-list gi-forward-list ] [ po-forward-list po-forward-list ] } no port isolation Parameter gi-forward-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. po-forward-list —— The list of port channels. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Set port 1, 2, 4 and port channel 2 to the forward list of port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 311 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# port isolation gi-forward-list 1/0/1-2,1/0/4 po-forward-list 2 Set all Ethernet ports and port channels to forward list of port 1/0/2, namely restore to the default setting: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no port isolation 32.2 show port isolation interface Description The show port isolation interface command is used to display the forward port list of a port/port channel. Syntax show port isolation interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter port —— The number of Ethernet port you want to show its forward port list, in the format of 1/0/2. port-channel-id —— The ID of port channel you want to show its forward port list, ranging from 1 to 6. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the forward-list of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show port isolation interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 312 Display the forward-list of all Ethernet ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS# show port isolation interface 313 Chapter 33 Loopback Detection Commands With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback detection packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding port according to the configuration. 33.1 loopback-detection (global) Description The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection function globally. To disable it, use no loopback detection command. Syntax loopback-detection no loopback-detection Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the loopback detection function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection 33.2 loopback-detection interval Description The loopback-detection interval command is used to define the interval of sending loopback detection packets from switch ports to network, aiming at detecting network loops periodically. 314 Syntax loopback-detection interval interval-time Parameter interval-time —— The interval of sending loopback detection packets. It ranges from 1 to 1000 seconds. By default, this value is 30. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the interval-time as 50 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection interval 50 33.3 loopback-detection recovery-time Description The loopback-detection recovery-time command is used to configure the time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal status. Syntax loopback-detection recovery-time recovery-time Parameter recovery-time —— The time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to normal status, and the loopback detection would restart. It ranges from 60 to 1000000 seconds. By default, this value is 90. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 315 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the recovery-time as 70 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# loopback-detection recovery-time 70 33.4 loopback-detection (interface) Description The loopback-detection command is used to enable the loopback detection function of the specified port. To loopback-detection command. disable it, use no Syntax loopback-detection no loopback-detection Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the loopback detection function of ports 1-3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 T2600G-28TS(Config-if-range)# loopback-detection 316 33.5 loopback-detection config process-mode Description The loopback-detection config process-mode command is used to configure the process-mode for the ports by which the switch copes with the detected loops. You also need to configure the recovery mode to remove the block status of the port or VLAN when the process-mode is Port Based or VLAN Based. Syntax loopback-detection config process-mode { alert | port-based | vlan-based } Parameter alert —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. It is the default setting. port-based —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the port on which the loop is detected and no packets can pass through the port. vlan-based —— When a loop is detected, the switch will send a trap message and generate an entry on the log file. In addition, the switch will block the VLAN in which the loop is detected and only the packets of the blocked VLAN cannot pass through the port. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the loopback detection process-mode as port-based for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 317 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# loopback-detection config process-mode port-based 33.6 loopback-detection config recovery-mode Description The loopback-detection config recovery-mode command is used to configure the recovery-mode for the ports by which the switch copes with the detected loops. Using this command you can remove the block status of the port or VLAN when the process-mode is Port Based or VLAN Based. Syntax loopback-detection config recovery-mode { auto | manual } Parameter auto —— Block status can be automatically removed after recovery time. manual —— Block status can only be removed manually. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the loopback detection recovery-mode as manual for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# loopback-detection config recovery-mode manual 318 33.7 loopback-detection recover Description The loopback-detection recover command is used to remove the block status of selected ports, recovering the blocked ports to normal status, Syntax loopback-detection recover Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet | interface range gigabitEthernet | interface port-channel | interface range port-channel ) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Recover the blocked port 1/0/2 to normal status: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# loopback-detection recover 33.8 show loopback-detection global Description The show loopback-detection global command is used to display the global configuration of loopback detection function such as loopback detection global status, loopback detection interval and loopback detection recovery time. Syntax show loopback-detection global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 319 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of loopback detection function: T2600G-28TS# show loopback-detection global 33.9 show loopback-detection interface Description The show loopback-detection interface command is used to display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of the specified Ethernet port. Syntax show loopback-detection interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel lagid ] [ detail ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. lagid —— The number of LAG, ranging from 1 to 14. detail —— Displays the loop status and block status of the VLAN which the specified port belongs to. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of all ports: T2600G-28TS# show loopback-detection interface 320 Display the configuration of loopback detection function and the status of port 5: T2600G-28TS# show loopback-detection interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 321 Chapter 34 DDM Commands Note: T2600G-28MPS doesn’t support these commands. The DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) function allows the user to monitor the status of the SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. The user can choose to shut down the monitoring SFP port automatically when specified parameter exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. The monitoring parameters include: Temperature, Voltage, Bias Current, Tx Power and Rx Power. 34.1 ddm state enable Description The ddm state enable command is used to enable the DDM function on the specified SFP port. Use the no ddm state enable command to disable the DDM function on this port. Syntax ddm state enable no ddm state enable Default Setting Enabled on all the SFP ports. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Enable DDM function on port 1/0/25: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm state enable 322 34.2 ddm shutdown Description The ddm shutdown command is used to configure whether to shut down the port when an exceeding alarm threshold or warning threshold event is encountered. Syntax ddm shutdown { none | warning | alarm } Parameter none —— The port will never be shut down regardless of the exceeding alarm threshold and warning threshold events. warning —— Shut down the port when an exceeding warning threshold event is encountered. alarm —— Shut down the port when an exceeding alarm threshold event is encountered. Default Setting none, which means the port will never be shut down regardless of the exceeding alarm threshold and warning threshold events. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Shut down the port 1/0/25 when an exceeding warning threshold event is encountered: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm shutdown warning 323 34.3 ddm temperature_threshold Description The ddm temperature_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM temperature value. Syntax ddm temperature_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value Parameter high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. value —— Enter the threshold value in Celsius. Default Setting None. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) 324 Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM temperature on the port 1/0/25 as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm temperature_threshold high_alarm 5 34.4 ddm voltage_threshold Description The ddm voltage_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM voltage value. Syntax ddm voltage_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value Parameter high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. value —— Enter the threshold value in Volt. 325 Default Setting None. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM voltage on the port 1/0/25 as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm voltage_threshold high_alarm 5 34.5 ddm bias_current_threshold Description The ddm bias_current_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Bias Current value. Syntax ddm bias_current_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value Parameter high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. 326 low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. value —— Enter the threshold value in mA. Default Setting None. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Bias Current on the port 1/0/25 as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm bias_current_threshold high_alarm 5 34.6 ddm tx_power_threshold Description The ddm tx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Tx Power value. Syntax ddm tx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value Parameter high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. 327 high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. value —— Enter the threshold value in mW. Default Setting None. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Tx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm tx_power_threshold high_alarm 5 34.7 ddm rx_power_threshold Description The ddm rx_power_threshold command is used to configure the threshold of the DDM Rx Power value. Syntax ddm rx_power_threshold { high_alarm | high_warning | low_alarm | low_warning } value 328 Parameter high_alarm —— Specify the highest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. high_warning ——Specify the highest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter rises above the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. low_alarm ——Specify the lowest threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the alarm will be taken. low_warning —— Specify the lowest threshold for the warning. When the operating parameter falls below the value hereinafter, action associated with the warning will be taken. value —— Enter the threshold value in mW. Default Setting None. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface fastEthernet / interface range fastEthernet / interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Example Configure the high_alarm threshold of DDM Rx Power on the port 1/0/25 as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/25 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ddm rx_power_threshold high_alarm 5 34.8 show ddm configuration Description The show ddm configuration command is used to display the DDM configuration. 329 Syntax show ddm configuration { state | temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power } Parameter state —— Display the DDM configuration state. temperature —— Displays the threshold of the DDM temperature value. voltage —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Voltage value. bias_current —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Bias Current value. tx_power —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Tx Power value. rx_power —— Displays the threshold of the DDM Rx Power value. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Example View the DDM configuration state: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm configuration state View the threshold of the DDM Voltage value: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm configuration voltage 34.9 show ddm status Description The show ddm status command is used to display the DDM status, which is the digital diagnostic monitoring status of SFP modules inserting into the switch’s SFP ports. Syntax show ddm status 330 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Example View the DDM status: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ddm status 331 Chapter 35 ACL Commands ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter data packets by configuring a series of match conditions, operations and time ranges. It provides a flexible and secured access control policy and facilitates you to control the network security. 35.1 time-range Description The time-range command is used to add Time-Range. To delete the corresponding Time-Range, use no time-range command. A time-range based ACL enables you to implement ACL control over packets by differentiating the time-ranges. A time-range can be specified in each rule in an ACL. The rule takes effect only when the specified time-range is configured and the system time is within the time-range. Syntax time-range name no time-range name Parameter name —— The Time-Range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a time-range named tSeg1: T2600G-28TS(config)# time-range tSeg1 332 35.2 absolute Description The absolute command is used to configure a time-range into an absoluteness mode. To delete the corresponding Absoluteness Mode time-range, use no absolute command. Syntax absolute start start-date end end-date no absolute Parameter start-date —— The start date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY. By default, it is 01/01/1970. end-date —— The end date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY. By default, it is 12/31/2099. The Absoluteness Mode will be disabled if the start date and end date are both in default value. Command Mode Time-range Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the time-range tSeg1 with time from May 5, 2012 to Oct. 5, 2012: T2600G-28TS(config)# time-range tSeg1 T2600G-28TS(config-time-range)# absolute start 05/05/2012 end 10/05/2012 333 35.3 periodic Description The periodic command is used to configure the time-range into periodic mode. To delete the corresponding Periodic Mode time-range, use no periodic command. To delete the corresponding Periodic Mode week-date time-range, use no periodic week-date command. To delete the corresponding Periodic Mode time-slice time-range, use no periodic time-slice command. Syntax periodic [week-date week-day] [time-slice1 time-slice] [time-slice2 time-slice] [time-slice3 time-slice] [time-slice4 time-slice] no periodic no periodic week-date no periodic time-slice Parameter week-day —— Periodic Mode, in the format of 1-3,6 or daily, weekend, weekdays. 1-3, 6 represent Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Saturday; daily represents every day; weekend represents weekend and weekdays represents working day. By default, the Periodic Mode is disabled. time-slice —— Create the time-slice, in the format of HH:MM-HH:MM. Command Mode Time-range Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the time-range tSeg1 with time from 8:30 to 12:00 at weekend: T2600G-28TS(config)#time-range tSeg1 334 T2600G-28TS(config-time-range)#periodic week-date weekend time-slice1 08:30-12:00 35.4 holiday Description The holiday command is used to configure the time-range into Holiday Mode under Time-range Create Configuration Mode. To delete the corresponding Holiday Mode time-range, use no holiday command. Syntax holiday no holiday Command Mode Time-range Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the time-range tSeg1 into Holiday Mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#time-range tSeg1 T2600G-28TS(config-time-range)#holiday 35.5 holiday (global) Description The holiday command is used to define a holiday. To delete the corresponding holiday, use no holiday command. Syntax holiday name start-date start-date end-date end-date 335 no holiday Parameter name —— The holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. start-date —— The start date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/01. end-date —— The end date of the holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/03. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Define National Day, configuring the start date as October 1st, and the end date as October 3rd: T2600G-28TS(config)#holiday nationalday start-date 10/01 end-date 10/03 35.6 access-list create Description The access-list create command is used to create Standard-IP ACL, Extend-IP ACL, Combined ACL, IPv6 ACL and Packet Content ACL. Syntax access-list create access-list-num Parameter access-list-num —— ACL ID, ranging from 0 to 4499. The ID range of the Standard-IP ACL is 500-1499, the Extend-IP ACL is 1500-2499, the 336 Combined ACL is 2500-3499, the IPv6 ACL is 3500-4499 and the Packet Content ACL is 4500-4999. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a standard-IP ACL whose ID is 523: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 523 35.7 mac access-list Description The mac access-list command is used to create MAC ACL. To set the detailed configurations for a specified MAC ACL, use mac access-list command to access Mac Access-list Configuration Mode. To delete the MAC ACL, use no mac access-list. Syntax mac access-list access-list-num no mac access-list access-list-num Parameter access-list-num —— ACL ID, ranging from 0 to 499. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 337 Example Create a MAC ACL whose ID is 423: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac access-list 423 35.8 access-list standard Description The access-list standard command is used to add Standard-IP ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no access-list standard command. Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets. Syntax access-list standard acl-id rule rule-id { deny | permit } [[ sip source-ip ] smask source-ip-mask] [[ dip destination-ip ] dmask destination-ip-mask ] [ tseg time-segment ] no access-list standard acl-id rule rule-id Parameter acl-id —— The desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration. rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. source-ip —— The source IP address contained in the rule. source-ip-mask —— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed the source IP address. destination-ip —— The destination IP address contained in the rule. destination-ip-mask —— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you typed the destination IP address. 338 time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a Standard-IP ACL whose ID is 520, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the source IP address is 192.168.0.100, the source IP address mask is 255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is “tRange1”, and the packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 520 T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list standard 520 rule 10 permit sip 192.168.0.100 smask 255.255.255.0 tseg tSeg1 35.9 access-list extended Description The access-list extended command is used to add Extended-IP ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no access-list extended command. Syntax access-list extended acl-id rule rule-id { deny | permit } [[ sip source-ip ] smask source-ip-mask ] [[ dip destination-ip] dmask destination-ip-mask ] [ tseg time-segment ] [frag {disable | enable}] [ dscp dscp ] [ s-port s-port ] [ d-port d-port ] [ tcpflag tcpflag ] [ protocol protocol ] [ tos tos ] [ pre pre ] no access-list extended acl-id rule rule-id Parameter acl-id——The desired Extended-IP ACL for configuration. 339 rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. source-ip —— The source IP address contained in the rule. source-ip-mask —— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed the source IP address. destination-ip —— The destination IP address contained in the rule. destination-ip-mask —— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you typed the destination IP address. time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. frag —— Enable/Disable Fragment. By default, it is disabled. If Fragment is enabled, this rule will process all the fragments and the last piece of fragment will be always forwarded. dscp —— Specify the dscp value, ranging from 0 to 63. s-port —— The source port number. d-port —— The destination port number. tcpflag —— Specify the flag value when using TCP protocol. protocol —— Configure the value of the matching protocol. tos —— Enter the IP ToS contained in the rule. pre —— Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 340 Example Create an Extended-IP ACL whose ID is 2220, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the source IP address is 192.168.0.100, the source IP address mask is 255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is tSeg1, and the packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 2220 T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list extended 2220 rule 10 permit sip 192.168.0.100 smask 255.255.255.0 tseg tSeg1 35.10 access-list combined Description The access-list combined command is used to add Combined ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no access-list combined command. Combined ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions. Syntax access-list combined acl-id rule rule-id { deny | permit } [ [ smac source-mac ] smask source-mac-mask ] [ [ dmac destination-mac ] dmask destination-mac-mask ] [ vid vlan-id ] [ type ethernet-type ] [ pri user-pri ] [ [ sip source-ip ] sip-mask source-ip-mask ] [ [ dip destination-ip ] dip-mask destination-ip-mask ] [ tseg time-segment ] no access-list combined acl-id rule rule-id Parameter acl-id —— The desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration. rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. source-mac —— The source MAC address contained in the rule. 341 source-mac-mask —— The source MAC address mask. It is required if you typed the source MAC address. destination-mac —— The destination MAC address contained in the rule. destination-mac-mask —— The destination MAC address mask. It is required if you typed the destination MAC address. vlan-id —— The VLAN ID contained in the rule, ranging from 1 to 4094. ethernet-type —— EtherType contained in the rule, in the format of 4-hex number. user-pri —— The user priority contained in the rule, ranging from 0 to 7. By default, it is not limited. time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. source-ip —— The source IP address contained in the rule. source-ip-mask —— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed the source IP address. destination-ip —— The destination IP address contained in the rule. destination-ip-mask —— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you typed the destination IP address. time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 342 User Guidelines Before binding a Combined ACL to a VLAN or interface, you should configure the SDM template as “default” or “enterpriseV4” and save your configurations. For more information about SDM configuration, refer to sdm prefer. Example Create a Combined ACL whose ID is 2700, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the source MAC address is 00:01:3F:48:16:23, the source MAC address mask is 11:11:11:11:11:00, the source IP address is 192.168.0.100, the source IP address mask is 255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is “tSeg1”, and the packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 2700 T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list combined 2700 rule 10 permit smac 00:01:3F:48:16:23 smask 11:11:11:11:11:00 sip 192.168.0.100 sip-mask 255.255.255.0 tseg tSeg1 35.11 access-list ipv6 Description The access-list ipv6 command is used to add IPv6 ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no access-list ipv6 command. Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets, the DSCP and flow-label value, etc. Syntax access-list ipv6 acl-id rule rule-id { deny | permit } [dscp dscp-value] [flow-label flow-label-value] [ [ sip source-ip ] sip-mask source-ip-mask] [ [ dip destination-ip ] dip-mask destination-ip-mask ] [ s-port s-port ] [ d-port d-port ] [ tseg time-segment ] no access-list ipv6 acl-id rule rule-id 343 Parameter acl-id —— The desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration. rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. dscp-value —— Specify the dscp value, ranging from 0 to 63. flow-label-value —— The IPv6 flow label, which ranges from 0-0xfffff. source-ip —— The source IP address contained in the rule. source-ip-mask —— The source IP address mask. It is required if you typed the source IP address. destination-ip —— The destination IP address contained in the rule. destination-ip-mask —— The destination IP address mask. It is required if you typed the destination IP address. s-port —— The source port number. d-port —— The destination port number. (Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support s-port and d-port setting.) time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 344 User Guidelines Before binding an IPv6 ACL to a VLAN or interface, you should configure the SDM template as “enterpriseV6” and save your configurations. For more information about SDM configuration, refer to sdm prefer. Example Create an IPv6 ACL whose ID is 3600, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the source IP address is 3001::1, the source IP address mask is 255.255.255.0, the time-range for the rule to take effect is “tSeg1”, and the packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list create 3600 T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list ipv6 3600 rule 10 permit sip 3001::1 sip-mask ffff:ffff:ff00:00ff tseg tSeg1 35.12 rule Description The rule command is used to configure MAC ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no rule command. Syntax rule rule-id { deny | permit } [[ smac source-mac ] smask source-mac-mask ] [[ dmac destination-mac ] dmask destination-mac-mask ] [ vid vlan-id ] [ type ethernet-type ] [ pri user-pri ] [ tseg time-segment ] no rule rule-id Parameter rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. source-mac —— The source MAC address contained in the rule. 345 source-mac-mask —— The source MAC address mask. It is required if you typed the source MAC address. destination-mac —— The destination MAC address contained in the rule. destination-mac-mask —— The destination MAC address mask. It is required if you typed the destination MAC address. vlan-id —— The VLAN ID contained in the rule, ranging from 1 to 4094. ethernet-type —— EtherType contained in the rule, in the format of 4-hex number. user-pri —— The user priority contained in the rule, ranging from 0 to 7. By default, it is not limited. time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. Command Mode MAC Access-list Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a MAC ACL whose ID is 20, and add Rule 10 for it. In the rule, the source MAC address is 00:01:3F:48:16:23, the source MAC address mask is 11:11:11:11:11:00, VLAN ID is 2, the user priority is 5, the time-range for the rule to take effect is “tRange1”, and the packets match this rule will be forwarded by the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# mac access-list 20 T2600G-28TS(config-mac-acl)# rule 10 permit smac 00:01:3F:48:16:23 smask 11:11:11:11:11:00 vid 2 pri 5 tseg tRange1 346 35.13 access-list policy name Description The access-list policy name command is used to add Policy. To delete the corresponding Policy, use no access-list policy name command. A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by configuring ACLs and actions together for effect. The operations here include stream mirror, stream condition, QoS Remarking and redirect. Syntax access-list policy name name no access-list policy name name Parameter name —— The Policy Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a Policy named policy1: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list policy name policy1 35.14 access-list policy action Description The access-list policy action command is used to add ACLs and create actions for the policy. To set the detailed configuration of actions for a policy, use access-list policy action command to access Action Configuration Mode. To delete the corresponding actions, use no access-list policy action command. 347 Syntax access-list policy action policy-name acl-id no access-list policy action policy-name acl-id Parameter policy-name —— The Policy Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. acl-id —— The ID of the ACL to which the above policy is applied. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add ACL whose ID is 120 to policy1 and create an action for them: T2600G-28TS(config)# access-list policy action policy1 120 35.15 redirect interface Description The redirect interface command is used to configure Direction function of policy action for specified ports. Syntax redirect interface { gigabitEthernet port } Parameter port —— The Destination Port of Redirect. The data packets matching the corresponding ACL will be forwarded to the specific port. By default, it is All Ports. Command Mode Action Configuration Mode 348 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Edit the actions for policy1. Forward the data packets matching ACL 120 in the policy to Gigabit Ethernet port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120 T2600G-28TS(config-action)#redirect interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 35.16 s-condition Description The s-condition command is used to configure Stream Condition function of policy action. Syntax s-condition rate rate osd { none | discard } Parameter rate —— The rate of Stream Condition, ranging from 0 to 1000000kbps. osd —— Out of Band disposal of Stream Condition. It is the disposal way of the data packets those are transmitted beyond the rate. There are two options, “none” and “discard”. By default, the option is “none”. Command Mode Action Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Edit the actions for policy1. For the data packets matching ACL 120 in the policy, if the rate beyond 1000kbps, they will be discarded by the switch: 349 T2600G-28TS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120 T2600G-28TS(config-action)#s-condition rate 1000 osd discard 35.17 s-mirror Description The s-mirror command is used to configure Stream Mirror function of policy action to the specified port. Syntax s-mirror interface { gigabitEthernet port } Parameter port —— The Mirror Port number of Stream Mirror. Command Mode Action Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Edit the actions for policy1. Specify the mirror port as Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2 for the data packets matching ACL 120: T2600G-28TS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120 T2600G-28TS(config-action)#s-mirror interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 35.18 qos-remark Description The qos-remark command is used to configure QoS Remark function of policy action. 350 Syntax qos-remark [ dscp dscp ] [ priority pri ] [dot1p dot1p-pri] no qos-remark Parameter dscp —— DSCP of QoS Remark. Specify the DSCP region for the data packets matching the corresponding ACL. DSCP ranges from 0 to 63. By default, it is not limited. pri —— Local Priority of QoS Remark. Specify the local priority for the data packets matching the corresponding ACL. Local Priority ranges from 0 to 7. dot1p-pri —— 802.1P priority of QoS Remark. This remark configuration will change the data packet's 802.1P priority field to the dot1p-pri you set. 802.1P priority ranges from 0 to 7. Command Mode Action Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Edit the actions for policy1. For the data packets matching ACL 120, specify the DSCP region as 30 and local priority 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#access-list policy action policy1 120 T2600G-28TS(config-action)# qos-remark dscp 30 priority 2 35.19 access-list bind acl (interface) Description The access-list bind acl command is used to bind an ACL to the specified port. To cancel the bind relation, use no access-list bind acl command. 351 Syntax access-list bind acl acl-id no access-list bind acl acl-id Parameter acl-id —— The ID of the ACL desired to bind. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind ACL 100 to port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# access-list bind acl 100 35.20 access-list bind acl (vlan) Note: Packet content ACL doesn’t support VLAN bind. Description The access-list bind acl command is used to bind an ACL to the specified VLAN. To cancel the bind relation, use no access-list bind acl command. Syntax access-list bind acl acl-id no access-list bind acl acl-id Parameter acl-id —— The ID of the ACL desired to bind. 352 Command Mode Interface VLAN Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind ACL 100 to VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# access-list bind acl 100 35.21 access-list bind (interface) Description The access-list bind command is used to bind a policy to a specified port. To cancel the bind relation, use no access-list bind command. Syntax access-list bind policy-name no access-list bind policy-name Parameter policy-name —— The name of the policy desired to bind. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 353 Example Bind policy1 to port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# access-list bind policy1 35.22 access-list packet-content profile Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. Description The access-list packet-content profile command is used to configure packet-content ACL chunk offset profile. There are four chunks to be configured. They must be configured before you configure the chunk value&mask. The offset value ranges from 0 to 31. Offset 31 matches the 1,2,127,128 bytes of the packet, offset 0 matches the 3,4,5,6 bytes of the packet, offset 1 matches the 7,8,9,10 bytes of the packet, and so on, for the rest of the offset value. Syntax access-list packet-content profile chunk-offset0 offset0 chunk-offset1 offset1 chunk-offset2 offset2 chunk-offset3 offset3 Parameter offset —— The offset value, ranging from 0 to 31. Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure a packet content profile with offset 0,1,2,3: 354 T2600-28TS(config)# access-list packet-content profile chunk-offset0 0 chunk-offset1 1 chunk-offset2 2 chunk-offset3 3 35.23 access-list packet-content config Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. Description The access-list packet-content config command is used to add Packet Content ACL rule. To delete the corresponding rule, use no access-list packet-content config command. Packet content ACLs analyze and process data packets based on 4 chunk match conditions, each chunk can specify a user-defined 4-byte segment carried in the packet's first 128 bytes. Syntax access-list packet-content config acl-id rule rule-id {deny | permit} [chunk0 value mask0 mask] [chunk1 value mask1 mask] [chunk2 value mask2 mask] [chunk3 value mask3 mask] [tseg time-segment] Parameter acl-id —— The desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration. rule-id —— The rule ID. deny —— The operation to discard packets. permit ——The operation to forward packets. It is the default value. value—— Specify the chunk value, ranging from 0-ffffffff. Mask ——Specify the chunk mask, ranging from 0-ffffffff. Chunk mask here must be written completely in 4-byte hex mode, like '0000ffff'. time-segment —— The time-range for the rule to take effect. By default, it is not limited. Command mode Global Configuration Mode 355 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a packet-content acl rule with all 4 chunks configured, the rule id is 1 and the default action is permit: T2600-28TS(config)# access-list packet-content config rule 1 permit chunk0 45ea mask0 0000ffff chunk1 1111ffff mask1 ffffffff chunk2 ee34 mask2 ffff0000 chunk3 7878 mask3 000ffae3 T2600-28TS(config)# access-list packet-content profile chunk-offset0 0 chunk-offset1 1 chunk-offset2 2 chunk-offset3 3 35.24 access-list bind (vlan) Note: Packet content ACL doesn’t support VLAN bind. Description The access-list bind command is used to bind a policy to a VLAN. To cancel the bind relation, use no access-list bind command. Syntax access-list bind policy-name no access-list bind policy-name Parameter policy-name —— The name of the policy desired to bind. Command Mode Interface VLAN Mode 356 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind policy1 to VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# access-list bind policy1 35.25 show access-list Description The show access-list command is used to display configuration of ACL. Syntax show access-list acl-id Parameter acl-id —— The ID of the ACL selected to display the configuration. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of the MAC ACL whose ID is 20: T2600G-28TS(config)# show access-list 20 357 35.26 show access-list status Description The show access-list status command is used to display the status of ACL hardware entry table. Here you can view the total number and available number of the ACL entries. Syntax show access-list status Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the status of ACL hardware entry table: T2600G-28TS(config)# show access-list status 35.27 show access-list policy Description The show access-list policy command is used to display the information of a specified policy. Syntax show access-list policy name Parameter name —— The Policy Name desired to show. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 358 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of a policy named policy1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show access-list policy policy1 35.28 show access-list bind Description The show access-list bind command is used to display the configuration of Policy bind. Syntax show access-list bind Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of Policy bind: T2600G-28TS(config)# show access-list bind 359 Chapter 36 MSTP Commands MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE 802.1s, can disbranch a ring network. STP is to block redundant links and backup links as well as optimize paths. 36.1 debug spanning-tree Description The debug spanning-tree command is used to enable debuggning of spanning-tree activities. To disable the debugging function, use no debug spanning-tree command. Syntax debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors | flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc } no debug spanning-tree { all | bpdu receive | bpdu transmit | cmpmsg | errors | flush | init | migration | proposals | roles | state | tc } Parameters all —— Display all the spanning-tree debug messages. bpdu receive —— Display the debug messages of the received spanning-tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). bpdu transmit —— Display the debug messages of the sent spanning-tree BPDU. cmpmsg —— Display the message priority debug messages. errors —— Display the MSTP error debug messages. flush —— Display the address table flushing debug messages. init —— Display the data structure initialization debug messages. migration —— Display the version migration debug messages. 360 proposals —— Display the MSTP handshake debug messages. roles —— Display the MSTP interface role switchling debug messages. state —— Display the MSTP interface state change debug messages. tc —— Display the MSTP topology event debug messages. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display all the spanning-tree debug messages: T2600G-28TS# debug spanning-tree all 36.2 spanning-tree (global) Description The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function globally. To disable the STP function, use no spanning-tree command. Syntax spanning-tree no spanning-tree Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the STP function: 361 T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree 36.3 spanning-tree (interface) Description The spanning-tree command is used to enable STP function for a port. To disable the STP function, use no spanning-tree command. Syntax spanning-tree no spanning-tree Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the STP function for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree 36.4 spanning-tree common-config Description The spanning-tree common-config command is used to configure the parameters of the ports for comparison in the CIST and the common parameters of all instances. To return to the default configuration, use no spanning-tree common-config command. CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree) is the spanning tree in a switched network, connecting all devices in the network. 362 Syntax spanning-tree common-config [ port-priority pri ] [ ext-cost ext-cost ] [ int-cost int-cost ] [ portfast { enable | disable }] [ point-to-point { auto | open | close }] no spanning-tree common-config Parameter pri —— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By default, the port priority is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the root port. In the same condition, the port with the highest priority will be chosen as the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. ext-cost —— External Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in different MST regions. It is an important criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto. int-cost —— Internal Path Cost, which is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority. By default, it is automatic. It ranges from o to 2000000. By default, it is 0 which is mean auto. portfast —— Enable/ Disable Edge Port. By default, it is disabled. The edge port can transit its state from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay. point-to-point —— The P2P link status, with auto, open and close options. By default, the option is auto. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port or designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to reduce the unnecessary forward delay. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 363 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the STP function of port 1, and configure the Port Priority as 64, ExtPath Cost as 100, IntPath Cost as 100, and then enable Edge Port: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree common-config port-priority 64 ext-cost 100 int-cost 100 portfast enable point-to-point open 36.5 spanning-tree mode Description The spanning-tree mode command is used to configure the STP mode of the switch. To return to the default configurations, use no spanning-tree mode command. Syntax spanning-tree mode { stp | rstp | mstp } no spanning-tree mode Parameter stp ——Spanning Tree Protocol, the default value. rstp ——Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol mstp ——Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 364 Example Configure the spanning-tree mode as mstp: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mode mstp 36.6 spanning-tree mst configuration Description The spanning-tree mst configuration command is used to access MST Configuration Mode from Global Configuration Mode, as to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping, region name and revision level. To return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance, use no spanning-tree mst configuration command. Syntax spanning-tree mst configuration no spanning-tree mst configuration Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enter into the MST configuration mode: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(Config-mst)# 365 36.7 instance Description The instance command is used to configure the VLAN-Instance mapping. To remove the VLAN-instance mapping or disable the corresponding instance, use no instance command. When an instance is disabled, the related mapping VLANs will be removed. Syntax instance instance-id vlan vlan-id no instance instance-id [ vlan vlan-id ] Parameters instance-id —— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8. vlan-id —— The VLAN ID selected to mapping with the corresponding instance. Command Mode MST Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Map the VLANs 1-100 to Instance 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 1-100 Disable Instance 1, namely remove all the mapping VLANs 1-100: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(config-mst)# no instance 1 Remove VLANs 1-50 in mapping VLANs 1-100 for Instance 1: 366 T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(config-mst)# no instance 1 vlan 1-50 36.8 name Description The name command is used to configure the region name of MST instance. Syntax name name Parameters name —— The region name, used to identify MST region. It ranges from 1 to 32 characters. Command Mode MST Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the region name of MST as “region1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(config-mst)# name region1 36.9 revision Description The revision command is used to configure the revision level of MST instance. 367 Syntax revision revision Parameters revision —— The revision level for MST region identification, ranging from 0 to 65535. Command Mode MST Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the revision level of MST as 100: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration T2600G-28TS(config-mst)# revision 100 36.10 spanning-tree mst instance Description The spanning-tree mst instance command is used to configure the priority of MST instance. To return to the default value of MST instance priority, use no spanning-tree mst instance command. Syntax spanning-tree mst instance instance-id priority pri no spanning-tree mst instance instance-id priority Parameter instance-id —— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8. pri —— MSTI Priority, which must be multiple of 4096 ranging from 0 to 61440. By default, it is 32768. MSTI priority is an important criterion on 368 determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge in the specific instance. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the MST Instance 1 and configure its priority as 4096: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 priority 4096 36.11 spanning-tree mst Description The spanning-tree mst command is used to configure MST Instance Port. To return to the default configuration of the corresponding Instance Port, use no spanning-tree mst command. A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance. You can use this command to configure the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the specified instance. Syntax spanning-tree mst instance instance-id {[ port-priority pri ] | [ cost cost ]} no spanning-tree mst instance instance-id Parameter instance-id —— Instance ID, ranging from 1 to 8. pri —— Port Priority, which must be multiple of 16 ranging from 0 to 240. By default, it is 128. Port Priority is an important criterion on determining if the port will be chosen as the root port by the device connected to this port. 369 cost —— Path Cost, ranging from 0 to 200000. The lower value has the higher priority. Its default value is 0 meaning “auto”. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the priority of port 1 in MST Instance 1 as 64, and path cost as 2000: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree mst instance 1 port-priority 64 cost 2000 36.12 spanning-tree priority Description The spanning-tree priority command is used to configure the bridge priority. To return to the default value of bridge priority, use no spanning-tree priority command. Syntax spanning-tree priority pri no spanning-tree priority Parameter pri —— Bridge priority, ranging from 0 to 61440. It is 32768 by default. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 370 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the bridge priority as 4096: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree priority 4096 36.13 spanning-tree timer Description The spanning-tree timer command is used to configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age of Spanning Tree. To return to the default configurations, use no spanning-tree timer command. Syntax spanning-tree timer {[ forward-time forward-time ] [ hello-time hello-time ] [ max-age max-age ]} no spanning-tree timer Parameter forward-time —— Forward Delay, which is the time for the port to transit its state after the network topology is changed. Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 in seconds and it is 15 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Forward Delay - 1) >= Max Age. hello-time ——Hello Time, which is the interval to send BPDU packets, and used to test the links. Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 in seconds and it is 2 by default. Otherwise, 2 * (Hello Time + 1) <= Max Age. max-age —— The maximum time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure, ranging from 6 to 40 in seconds. By default, it is 20. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 371 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure forward-time, hello-time and max-age for Spanning Tree as 16 seconds, 3 seconds and 22 seconds respectively: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree timer forward-time 16 hello-time 3 max-age 22 36.14 spanning-tree hold-count Description The spanning-tree hold-count command is used to configure the maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. To return to the default configurations, use no spanning-tree hold-count command. Syntax spanning-tree hold-count value no spanning-tree hold-count Parameter value —— The maximum number of BPDU packets transmitted per Hello Time interval, ranging from 1 to 20 in pps. By default, it is 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the hold-count of STP as 8pps: 372 T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree hold-count 8 36.15 spanning-tree max-hops Description The spanning-tree max-hops command is used to configure the maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. To return to the default configurations, use no spanning-tree max-hops command. Syntax spanning-tree max-hops value no spanning-tree max-hops Parameter value —— The maximum number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded, ranging from 1 to 40 in hop. By default, it is 20. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the max-hops of STP as 30: T2600G-28TS(config)# spanning-tree max-hops 30 36.16 spanning-tree bpdufilter Description The spanning-tree bpdufilter command is used to enable the BPDU filter function for a port. With the function enabled, the port can be prevented from 373 receiving and sending any BPDU packets. To disable the BPDU filter function, use no spanning-tree bpdufilter command. Syntax spanning-tree bpdufilter no spanning-tree bpdufilter Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the BPDU filter function for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter 36.17 spanning-tree bpduguard Description The spanning-tree bpduguard command is used to enable the BPDU protect function for a port. With the BPDU protect function enabled, the port will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when it receives BPDU packets, and the port will disable the forwarding function for a while. To disable the BPDU protect function, use no spanning-tree bpduguard command. Syntax spanning-tree bpduguard no spanning-tree bpduguard 374 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the BPDU protect function for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard 36.18 spanning-tree guard loop Description The spanning-tree guard loop command is used to enable the Loop Protect function for a port. Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions. To disable the Loop Protect function, use no spanning-tree guard loop command. Syntax spanning-tree guard loop no spanning-tree guard loop Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 375 Example Enable the Loop Protect function for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard loop 36.19 spanning-tree guard root Description The spanning-tree guard root command is used to enable the Root Protect function for a port. With the Root Protect function enabled, the root bridge will set itself automatically as ERROR-PORT when receiving BPDU packets with higher priority, in order to maintain the role of root ridge. To disable the Root Protect function, use no spanning-tree guard root command. Syntax spanning-tree guard root no spanning-tree guard root Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Root Protect function for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root 376 36.20 spanning-tree guard tc Description The spanning-tree guard tc command is used to enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree function for a port. To disable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree function, use no spanning-tree guard tc command. A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a malicious user continuously sends TC-BPDUs to a switch, the switch will be busy with removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and stability of the network. With the Protect of Spanning Tree function enabled, you can configure the number of TC-BPDUs in a required time, so as to avoid the process of removing MAC addresses frequently. Syntax spanning-tree guard tc no spanning-tree guard tc Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the TC Protect of Spanning Tree for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree guard tc 36.21 spanning-tree mcheck Description The spanning-tree mcheck command is used to enable mcheck. 377 Syntax spanning-tree mcheck Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable mcheck for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# spanning-tree mcheck 36.22 show spanning-tree active Description The show spanning-tree active command is used to display the active information of spanning-tree. Syntax show spanning-tree active Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the active information of spanning-tree: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree active 378 36.23 show spanning-tree bridge Description The show spanning-tree bridge command is used to display the bridge parameters. Syntax show spanning-tree bridge [ forward-time | hello-time | hold-count | max-age | max-hops | mode | priority | state ] Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the bridge parameters: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree bridge 36.24 show spanning-tree interface Description The show spanning-tree interface command is used to display the spanning-tree information of all ports or a specified port. Syntax show spanning-tree interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] [ edge | ext-cost | int-cost | mode | p2p | priority | role | state | status ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. 379 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the spanning-tree information of all ports: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface Display the spanning-tree information of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 Display the spanning-tree mode information of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 mode 36.25 show spanning-tree interface-security Description The show spanning-tree interface-security command is used to display the protect information of all ports or a specified port. Syntax show spanning-tree interface-security [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] [ bpdufilter | bpduguard | loop | root | tc | tc-defend ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. 380 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the protect information of all ports: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security Display the protect information of port 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Display the interface security bpdufilter information: T2600G-28TS(config)# show spanning-tree interface-security bpdufilter 36.26 show spanning-tree mst Description The show spanning-tree mst command is used to display the related information of MST Instance. Syntax show spanning-tree mst { configuration [ digest ] | instance instance-id [ interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] ] } Parameter instance-id —— Instance ID desired to show, ranging from 1 to 8. port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. 381 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the region information and mapping information of VLAN and MST Instance: T2600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst configuration Display the related information of MST Instance 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1 Display all the ports information of MST Instance 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#show spanning-tree mst instance 1 interface 382 Chapter 37 Ethernet OAM Commands Ethernet OAM (standing for Operation, Administration, and Maintenance) is Layer 2 protocol that is used for monitoring and troubleshooting Ethernet networks. It can report the network status to network administrators through the OAMPDUs exchanged between two OAM entities. The operation of OAM on an Ethernet interface does not adversely affect data traffic as OAM is a slow protocol with very limited bandwidth potential. 37.1 ethernet-oam Description The ethernet-oam command is used to enable the Ethernet OAM function for the desired port. To disable the Ethernet OAM function, use no ethernet-oam command. Syntax ethernet-oam no ethernet-oam Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Ethernet OAM function for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ethernet-oam 383 37.2 ethernet-oam mode Description The ethernet-oam mode command is used to configure the OAM mode for the desired port. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam mode command. The default mode is active. Syntax ethernet-oam mode { passive | active } no ethernet-oam mode Parameter passive —— Specify the OAM mode as passive. active ——Specify the OAM mode as active. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure Ethernet OAM client to operate in passive mode for Gigabit Ethernet port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ethernet-oam mode passive 37.3 ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period Description The ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error symbol period 384 event. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period command. Syntax ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period { threshold threshold | window window | notify { disable | enable }} no ethernet-oam link-monitor symbol-period { threshold | window | notify } Parameter threshold —— Configure the error threshold for generating error symbol-period event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1. window —— Configure the error symbol-period event detection interval. The range is from 10 to 600, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 10. notify —— Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled. threshold | window | notify —— The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example For error symbol-period event, configure the error threshold as 5 and the event detection interval as 3 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam threshold 5 window 30 385 link-monitor symbol-period 37.4 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame Description The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame event. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame command. Syntax ethernet-oam link-monitor frame { [threshold threshold ] [ window window ] [notify { disable | enable } ] } no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame { threshold | window | notify } Parameter threshold —— Configure the error threshold for generating error frame event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1. window —— Configure the error symbol-period event detection interval. The range is from 10 to 600, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 10. notify —— Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled. threshold | window | notify —— The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example For error frame event, configure the error threshold as 6 and the event detection interval as 9 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 386 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame threshold 6 window 90 37.5 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period Description The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame period event. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period command. Syntax ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period { [threshold threshold ] [ window window ] [notify { disable | enable } ] } no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period { threshold | window | notify } Parameter threshold —— Configure the error threshold for generating error frame period event. The range is from 1 to 4294967295 and the default value is 1. window —— Configure the error frame period event detection interval. The range is from 148810 to 89286000. The default value is 148810 for Fast Ethernet port and 1488100 for Gigabit Ethernet port. notify —— Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled. threshold | window | notify —— The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 387 Example For error frame period event, configure the error threshold as 6 and the event detection interval as 150000 frames on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/4: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/4 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-period threshold 6 window 150000 37.6 ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds Description The ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds command is used to configure the parameters about one of the link events, error frame seconds event. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds command. Syntax ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds { [threshold threshold ] [ window window ] [notify { disable | enable } ] } no ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds { threshold | window | notify } Parameter threshold —— Configure the error threshold for generating error frame seconds event. The range is from 1 to 900 and the default value is 1. window —— Configure the error frame seconds event detection interval. The range is from 100 to 9000, in terms of 100 ms intervals. The default value is 600. notify —— Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled. threshold | window | notify —— The parameter that you want to return to the default configuration. 388 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example For error frame seconds event, configure the error threshold as 8 and the event detection interval as 30 seconds on Gigabit Ethernet port 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam link-monitor frame-seconds threshold 8 window 300 37.7 ethernet-oam remote-failure Description The ethernet-oam remote-failure command is used to configure whether to notify the link faults or not. The link faults include dying gasp and critical event. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam remote-failure command. Syntax ethernet-oam remote-failure { dying-gasp | critical-event } notify { disable | enable } no ethernet-oam remote-failure { dying-gasp | critical-event } notify Parameter dying-gasp —— Dying Gasp link event. Dying gasp means an unrecoverable fault, such as power failure, occurs. critical-event —— Critical Event. Critical-event means unspecified critical event occurs. 389 notify ——Enable/Disable the event notification. By default, it is enabled. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Disable the Dying Gasp link event notification on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/7: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/7 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-failure dying-gasp notify disable 37.8 ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote- loopback Description The ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback command is used to configure the client to process or to ignore the received remote loopback request. To return to the default configurations, use no ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback command. Syntax ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback { process | ignore } no ethernet-oam remote-loopback received-remote-loopback Parameter process —— Process the received remote loopback request. ignore —— Ignore the received remote loopback request. 390 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the client to process the received remote loopback request on Gigabit Ethernet port 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-loopback received -remote-loopback process 37.9 ethernet-oam remote-loopback Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. Description The ethernet-oam remote-loopback command is used to request the remote peer to start or stop the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode. Syntax ethernet-oam remote-loopback { start | stop } Parameter start —— Request the remote peer to start the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode. stop —— Request the remote peer to stop the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode. 391 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Request the remote peer to start the Ethernet OAM remote loopback mode on Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ethernet-oam remote-loopback start 37.10 clear ethernet-oam statistics Description The clear ethernet-oam statistics command is used to clear Ethernet OAM statistics. Syntax clear ethernet-oam statistics [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM statistics of all ports are cleared. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Clear Ethernet OAM statistics of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3: 392 T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ethernet-oam statistics interface gigabit Ethernet 1/0/3 37.11 clear ethernet-oam event-log Description The clear ethernet-oam event-log command is used to clear the Ethernet OAM event log. Syntax clear ethernet-oam event-log [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port ——The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM event logs of all ports are cleared. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Clear Ethernet OAM event log of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ethernet-oam event-log interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 37.12 show ethernet-oam configuration Description The show ethernet-oam configuration command is used to display Ethernet OAM configuration information. 393 Syntax show ethernet-oam configuration [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM configuration information of all ports is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display Ethernet OAM configuration information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam configuration interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 37.13 show ethernet-oam event-log Description The show ethernet-oam event-log command is used to display the Ethernet OAM event log. Syntax show ethernet-oam event-log [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM event logs of all ports are displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 394 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display Ethernet OAM event log of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ethernet-oam event-log interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 37.14 show ethernet-oam statistics Description The show ethernet-oam statistics command is used to display the Ethernet OAM statistics. Syntax show ethernet-oam statistics [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM statistics of all ports are displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display Ethernet OAM statistics of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 395 ethernet-oam statistics interface 37.15 show ethernet-oam status Description The show ethernet-oam status command is used to display the Ethernet OAM status of both the local and the remote client. Syntax show ethernet-oam status [ interface gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. By default, the Ethernet OAM status of all ports is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Display Ethernet OAM status of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 396 ethernet-oam status interface Chapter 38 DLDP Commands DLDP (Device Link Detection Protocol) is used to monitor the link state of fiber-optic or twisted-pair Ethernet cables. When a unidirectional link is detected, the corresponding port will be shut down automatically or manually (depending on the shut mode configured). 38.1 dldp (global) Description The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function globally. To disable it, use no dldp command. Syntax dldp no dldp Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DLDP function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# dldp 38.2 dldp interval Description The dldp interval command is used to define the interval of sending advertisement packets on ports that are in the advertisement state. 397 Syntax dldp interval interval-time Parameter interval-time —— The interval of sending advertisement packets. It ranges from 1 to 30 seconds. By default, it is 5 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the interval of sending advertisement packets as 10 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# dldp interval 10 38.3 dldp shut-mode Description The dldp shut-mode command is used to configure the shutdown mode when a unidirectional link is detected. Syntax dldp shut-mode { auto | manual } Parameter auto —— The switch automatically shuts down ports when a unidirectional link is detected. By default, the shut-mode is auto. manual ——The switch displays an alert when a unidirectional link is detected. The operation to shut down the unidirectional link ports is accomplished by the users. 398 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the shut-mode as manual: T2600G-28TS(config)# dldp shut-mode manual 38.4 dldp reset (global) Description The dldp reset command is used to reset all the unidirectional links and restart the link detect process. Syntax dldp reset Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Reset the DLDP function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# dldp reset 38.5 dldp (interface) Description The dldp command is used to enable the DLDP function of the specified port. To disable it, use no dldp command. 399 Syntax dldp no dldp Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the DLDP function of ports 1/0/2-4: T2600G-28TS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4 T2600G-28TS (config-if-range)# dldp 38.6 dldp reset (interface) Description The dldp reset command is used to reset the specified port and restart the link detect process. Syntax dldp reset Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 400 Example Reset the DLDP function of ports 2-4: T2600G-28TS (config)# interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-4 T2600G-28TS (config-if-range)# dldp reset 38.7 show dldp Description The show dldp command is used to display the global configuration of DLDP function such as DLDP global state, DLDP interval and shut mode. Syntax show dldp Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of DLDP function: T2600G-28TS# show dldp 38.8 show dldp interface Description The show dldp interface command is used to display the configuration and state of the specified Ethernet port. By default, the configuration and state of all the ports will be displayed. Syntax show dldp interface [gigabitEthernet port ] 401 Parameter port —— The Gigabit Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration and state of all ports: T2600G-28TS# show dldp interface Display the configuration and state of port 1/0/5: T2600G-28TS# show dldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/5 402 Chapter 39 IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Snooping (Internet Group Management Protocol Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the network. 39.1 ip igmp snooping (global) Description The ip igmp snooping command is used to configure IGMP Snooping globally. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, use no ip igmp snooping command. Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable IGMP Snooping function: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping 403 39.2 ip igmp snooping (interface) Description The ip igmp snooping command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping function for the desired port. To disable the IGMP Snooping function, use no ip igmp snooping command. Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable IGMP Snooping function of port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping 39.3 ip igmp snooping rtime Description The ip igmp snooping rtime command is used to specify router port aging time globally. To restore the default timer, use no ip igmp snooping rtime command. Syntax ip igmp snooping rtime rtime no ip igmp snooping rtime 404 Parameter rtime —— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The default aging time is 300 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify IGMP Snooping router port aging time as 100 seconds globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping rtime 100 39.4 ip igmp snooping mtime Description The ip igmp snooping mtime command is used to specify member port aging time globally. The default aging time is 260 seconds. To restore the default timer, use no ip igmp snooping mtime command. Syntax ip igmp snooping mtime mtime no ip igmp snooping mtime Parameter mtime —— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The default aging time is 260 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 405 Example Specify IGMP Snooping member port aging time as 100 seconds globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping mtime 100 39.5 ip igmp snooping report-suppression Description The ip igmp snooping report-suppression command is used enable the IGMP report suppression function. When it is enabled, the switch forwards only the first IGMP report message per mulicast group to the Layer 3 device, and the subsequent IGMP reports from the same multicast group are discarded. To disable the IGMP report suppression function and forward all the IGMP reports to the Layer 3 device, use no ip igmp snooping report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default. Syntax ip igmp snooping report-suppression no ip igmp snooping report-suppression Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IGMP report suppression function: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping report-suppression 406 39.6 ip igmp snooping immediate-leave Description The ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, use no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave command. Syntax ip igmp snooping immediate-leave no ip igmp snooping immediate-leave Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping immediate-leave 39.7 ip igmp snooping drop-unknown Description The ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command is used to process the unknown multicast as discard. To disable the operation of processing the unknown multicast as discard, use no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown command. Syntax ip igmp snooping drop-unknown 407 no ip igmp snooping drop-unknown Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the operation to process unknown multicast as discard: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping drop-unknown 39.8 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval Description The ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval command is used to specify the interval to send Specific Query Message. The default value is 1 second. To restore the default interval, use no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval command. Syntax ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval interval no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval Parameter interval —— Specify the interval to send Specific Query Message in seconds, ranging from 1 to 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 408 Example Specify the interval of Specific Query Message to 3 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping last-listener query-inteval 3 39.9 ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count Description The ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count command is used to specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent. The default value is 2. To restore the default number, use no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count command. Syntax ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count num no ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count Parameter num —— Specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent, ranging from 1 to 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the number of Specific Query Message to 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping last-listener query-count 3 409 39.10 ip igmp snooping vlan-config Description The ip igmp snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN IGMP Snooping function or to modify IGMP Snooping parameters, and to create static multicast IP entry. To disable the VLAN IGMP Snooping function, use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config command. To restore the default values, use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config with specified parameters. Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ip interface no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } Parameter vlan-id-list —— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5. router-time —— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used. member-time —— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. 410 port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channels. ip —— The static multicast IP address. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IGMP Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300 seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3, and set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Add static multicast IP address 225.0.0.1, which corresponds to VLAN 2, and configure the forward ports as ports 1/0/1-3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 2 static 225.0.0.1 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 39.11 ip igmp snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) Description This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, use no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd command. 411 Syntax ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-port-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } no ip igmp snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-port-forbidd interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter vlan-id-list —— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5. port-list —— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded. port-channel-id —— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 : T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan-config 1 router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 39.12 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config Description The ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config command is used to create Multicast VLAN. To delete the corresponding Multicast VLAN, use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config command. To restore the default values, use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config with specified parameters. 412 Syntax ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] Parameter vlan-id —— The ID of the multicast VLAN desired to create or modify, ranging from 2 to 4094. If not specified, the default multicast VLAN will be selected. router-time —— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used. member-time —— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channels. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable Multicast VLAN 3, and configure Router Port Time as 100 seconds, Member Port Time 100 seconds, and Static Router Port port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rtime 100 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 mtime 100 413 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rport interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 39.13 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) Description This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, use no ip Syntax igmp snooping multi-vlan-config router-ports-forbidd command. ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] router-port-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config router-port-forbidd [ interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] Parameter vlan-id—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. port-list —— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded. port-channel-id —— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in multicast VLAN 1 : 414 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 1 router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 39.14 ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) Description This command is used to replace the multicast source IP address of the IGMP packets in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, Syntax use no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip command. ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] replace-sourceip ip no ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip Parameter vlan-id—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. ip —— Specify the IP address. The switch will use this IP address to replace the source IP address of the IGMP packets. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Replace the source IP address of the IGMP packets in multicast VLAN 1 as 192.168.0.112: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping multi-vlan-config 1 replace-sourceip 192.168.0.112 415 39.15 ip igmp snooping querier vlan Description The ip igmp snooping querier vlan command is used to enable the IGMP Snooping Querier function of the VLAN(s). To disable the IGMP Snooping Querier function of certain VLANs, use no ip igmp snooping querier vlan command. Syntax ip igmp snooping querier vlan vlan-id no ip igmp snooping querier vlan vlan-id Parameter vlan-id — VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the IGMP Snooping Querier function of VLAN 1: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 1 39.16 ip igmp snooping querier vlan (general query) Description The ip igmp snooping querier vlan command is used to configure the parameters for IGMP Snooping Querier to send a general query frame. To return to the default configuration, use no ip igmp snooping querier vlan command. 416 Syntax ip igmp snooping querier vlan vlan-id { query-interval interval | max-response-time response-time | general-query source-ip ip-addr } no ip igmp snooping querier max-response-time | general-query vlan vlan-id source-ip } { query-interval | Parameter vlan-id —— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. interval —— The time interval to send a general query frame by IGMP Snooping Querier, ranging from 10 to 300 (Seconds). By default, it is 60 seconds. response-time —— The maximal time for the host to respond to a general query frame, ranging from 1 to 25 (Seconds). By default, it is 10 Seconds. ip-addr —— The source IP of the general query frame sent by IGMP Snooping Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP. By default, it is 192.168.0.1. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example For VLAN 2, specify its query-interval as 200 seconds, and the response-time as 20 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 2 query-interval 200 T2600G-28TS(config)#ip igmp snooping querier vlan 2 max-response-time 20 417 39.17 ip igmp snooping max-groups Description The ip igmp snooping max-groups command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ip igmp snooping max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it receives an IGMP report message and the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to the default of no limitation on the specified port, use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping the report, use the no ip igmp snooping max-groups action command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups. Syntax ip igmp snooping max-groups [ maxgroup ] ip igmp snooping max-groups action { drop | replace } no ip igmp snooping max-groups no ip igmp snooping max-groups action Parameter maxgroup —— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000. drop —— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group. replace —— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 418 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10, and configure the throttling action as replace: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups 10 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ip igmp snooping max-groups action replace 39.18 ip igmp snooping authentication Description The ip igmp snooping authenticaiton command is used to authenticate the users who want to join the limited multicast source. To disable the multicast authentication, use no ip igmp snooping authentication command. Syntax ip igmp snooping authentication no ip igmp snooping authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 419 User Guidelines The IGMP Authentication feature will take effect only when AAA function is enabled and the RADIUS server is configured. For how to enable AAA function and configure RADIUS server, refer to aaa enable and radius-server host. Example Enable IGMP authentication on port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp snooping authentication 39.19 ip igmp snooping accounting Description The ip igmp snooping accounting command is used to enable IGMP accounting globally. To disable the IGMP accouting, use no ip igmp snooping accounting command. Syntax ip igmp snooping accounting no ip igmp snooping accounting Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable IGMP accounting globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp snooping accounting 420 39.20 ip igmp profile Description The ip igmp profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To delete the corresponding profile, use no ip igmp profile command. Syntax ip igmp profile id no ip igmp profile id Parameter id —— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the profile 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1 39.21 deny Description The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny. Syntax deny Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode 421 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#deny 39.22 permit Description The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as permit. Syntax permit Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#permit 422 39.23 range Description The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address, use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries at most. Syntax range start-ip end-ip no range start-ip end-ip Parameter start-ip —— The start filtering multicast IP address. end-ip —— The end filtering multicast IP address. Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range 225.1.1.1 to 226.3.2.1 in profile 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip igmp profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#range 225.1.1.1 226.3.2.1 39.24 ip igmp filter Description The ip igmp filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the interface. To delete the binding, use no ip igmp filter command. 423 Syntax ip igmp filter profile-id no ip igmp filter Parameter profile-id —— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip igmp filter 1 39.25 clear ip igmp snooping statistics Description The clear ip igmp snooping statistics command is used to clear the statistics of the IGMP packets. Syntax clear ip igmp snooping statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 424 Example Clear the statistics of the IGMP packets: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ip igmp snooping statistics 39.26 show ip igmp snooping Description The show ip igmp snooping command is used to display the global configuration of IGMP snooping. Syntax show ip igmp snooping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of IGMP: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping 39.27 show ip igmp snooping interface Description The show ip igmp snooping interface command is used to display the port configuration of IGMP snooping. Syntax show ip igmp snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [ port | port-list ] ] { basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat } show ip igmp snooping interface [ port-channel [ port-channel-id ] ] { basic-config | max-groups } 425 Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration information selected to display. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IGMP baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface basic-config Display the IGMP basic configuration of port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 basic-config Display the IGMP packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4 packet-stat 39.28 show ip igmp snooping vlan Description The show ip igmp snooping vlan command is used to display the VLAN configuration of IGMP snooping. Syntax show ip igmp snooping vlan [ vlan-id ] 426 Parameter vlan-id ——The VLAN ID selected to display. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IGMP snooping configuration information of VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2 39.29 show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan Description The show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan command is used to display the Multicast VLAN configuration. Syntax show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the Multicast VLAN configuration: T2600G-28TS# show ip igmp snooping multi-vlan 427 39.30 show ip igmp snooping groups Description The show ip igmp snooping groups command is used to display the information of all IGMP snooping groups. It can be extended to some other commands to display the dynamic and static multicast information of a selected VLAN. Syntax show ip igmp snooping groups [ vlan { vlan-id } ] [ multicast_addr | count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ] Parameter vlan-id ——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast items. multicast_addr —— IP address of the multicast group. count—— The numbers of all multicast groups. dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups. dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups. static—— Display static multicast groups. static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of all IGMP snooping groups: T2600G-28TS#show ip igmp snooping groups Display all the multicast entries in VLAN 5: 428 T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 Display the count of multicast entries in VLAN 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 count Display the dynamic multicast groups of VLAN 5 T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic Display the static multicast groups of VLAN 5 T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static Display the count of dynamic multicast entries of VLAN 5 T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 dynamic count Display the count of static multicast entries of VLAN 5 T2600G-28TS(config)#show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 5 static count 39.31 show ip igmp snooping querier Description The show ip igmp snooping querier command is used to display the Querier configuration of VLAN. Syntax show ip igmp snooping querier [ vlan vlan-id ] Parameter vlan-id ——The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 429 Example Display all Querier information: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip igmp snooping querier 39.32 show ip igmp profile Description The show ip igmp profile command is used to display the configuration information of all the profiles or a specific profile. Syntax show ip igmp profile [ id ] Parameter id —— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration information of all profiles: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip igmp profile 430 Chapter 40 MLD Snooping Commands MLD Snooping (Multicast Listener Discovery Snooping) is a multicast control mechanism running on Layer 2 switch. It can effectively prevent multicast groups being broadcasted in the IPv6 network. 40.1 ipv6 mld snooping (global) Description The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function globally. If this function is disabled, all related MLD Snooping function would not work. To disable this function, use no ipv6 mld snooping command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping no ipv6 mld snooping Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable MLD Snooping: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping 40.2 ipv6 mld snooping (interface) Description The ipv6 mld snooping command is used to enable MLD Snooping function on the desired port. To disable this function, use no ipv6 mld snooping command. 431 Syntax ipv6 mld snooping no ipv6 mld snooping Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable MLD Snooping on port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping 40.3 ipv6 mld snooping rtime Description The ipv6 mld snooping rtime command is used to specify router port aging time globally. To restore the default timer, use no ipv6 mld snooping rtime command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping rtime rtime no ipv6 mld snooping rtime Parameter rtime —— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The default aging time is 300 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 432 Example Specify MLD Snooping router port aging time as 100 seconds globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping rtime 100 40.4 ipv6 mld snooping mtime Description The ipv6 mld snooping mtime command is used to specify member port aging time globally. The default aging time is 260 seconds. To restore the default timer, use no ipv6 mld snooping mtime command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping mtime mtime no ipv6 mld snooping mtime Parameter mtime —— Specify the aging time in seconds, ranging from 60 to 600. The default aging time is 260 seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify MLD Snooping member port aging time as 100 seconds globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping mtime 100 40.5 ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression Description The ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression command is used enable the MLD report suppression function. When it is enabled, the switch forwards only the first MLD report message per mulicast group to the Layer 3 device, 433 and the subsequent MLD reports from the same multicast group are discarded. To disable the MLD report suppression function and forward all the MLD reports to the Layer 3 device, use no ip igmp snooping report-suppression command. This function is disabled by default. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression no ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable MLD Report message suppression function: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping report-suppression 40.6 ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave Description The ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command is used to configure the Fast Leave function for port. To disable the Fast Leave function, use no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave no ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 434 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the Fast Leave function for port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld snooping immediate-leave 40.7 ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown Description The ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command is used to enable the unknown multicast packets filter function. To disable this function, use no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown command. By default, it is disabled. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown no ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable unknown multicast filter function: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping drop-unknown 40.8 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval Description The ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval command is used to specify the interval to send Specific Query Message. The default value is 1 435 second. To restore the default interval, use no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval interval no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval Parameter interval —— Specify the interval to send Specific Query Message in seconds, ranging from 1 to 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the interval of Specific Query Message to 3 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-inteval 3 40.9 ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count Description The ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count command is used to specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent. The default value is 2. To restore the default number, use no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count num no ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count Parameter num —— Specify the numbers of Specific Query Message to be sent, ranging from 1 to 5. 436 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the number of Specific Query Message to 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener query-count 3 40.10 ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config Description The ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command is used to enable VLAN MLD Snooping function or to modify MLD Snooping parameters, and to create static multicast IP entry. To disable the VLAN MLD Snooping function, use no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ip interface no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list static ip interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } Parameter vlan-id-list —— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5. 437 router-time —— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used. member-time —— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channels. ip —— The static multicast IP address. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the MLD Snooping function and modify Router Port Time as 300 seconds, Member Port Time as 200 seconds for VLAN 1-3, and set the router port as 1/0/1 for VLAN 1-2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 rtime 300 T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-3 mtime 200 T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1-2 rport interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 Add static multicast IP address ff01::1234:01, which corresponds to VLAN 2, and configure the forward ports as ports 1/0/1-3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 2 static ff01::1234:01 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 438 40.11 ip mld snooping vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) Description This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified VLAN(s). To delete the forbidden router ports, use no ipv6 mld Syntax snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-ports-forbidd command. ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-port-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } no ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config vlan-id-list router-port-forbidd interface [ gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameter vlan-id-list —— The ID list of the VLAN desired to modify configuration, ranging from 1 to 4094, in the format of 1-3, 5. port-list —— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded. port-channel-id —— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in VLAN 1 : T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan-config 1 router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 439 40.12 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config Description The ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config command is used to create Multicast VLAN. To delete the corresponding Multicast VLAN, use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config command. To restore the default values, Syntax use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config with specified parameters. ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [ rtime router-time | mtime member-time | rport interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] Parameter vlan-id —— The ID of the multicast VLAN desired to create or modify, ranging from 2 to 4094. If not specified, the default multicast VLAN will be selected. router-time —— Router Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. Router Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global router-time will be used. member-time —— Member Port Time. Within this time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. Member Port Time ranges from 60 to 600 in seconds. By default, it is 0 and the global member-time will be used. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channels. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 440 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable Multicast VLAN 3, and configure Router Port Time as 100 seconds, Member Port Time 100 seconds, and Static Router Port port 1/0/3: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rtime 100 T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 mtime 100 T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 3 rport interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 40.13 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (router-port-forbidden) Description This command is used to forbid the specified ports as being router ports in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, use no Syntax ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config router-ports-forbidd command. ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] router-port-forbidd interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config router-port-forbidd [ interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } ] Parameter vlan-id—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. port-list —— Forbid the specified ports as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these ports will be discarded. port-channel-id —— Forbid the specified port-channels as being router ports. Packets sent from multicast routers to these port-channels will be discarded. 441 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Forbid the Ethernet ports 1/0/1-3 as being router ports in multicast VLAN 1 : T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 1 router-port-forbidd interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-3 40.14 ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config (source-ip-replace) Description This command is used to replace the multicast source IP address of the MLD packets in the specified multicast VLAN. To delete the forbidden router ports, Syntax use no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip command. ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config [ vlan-id ] replace-sourceip ip no ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config replace-sourceip Parameter vlan-id—— The ID of the multicast VLAN. ip —— Specify the IP address. The switch will use this IP address to replace the source IP address of the MLD packets. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 442 Example Replace the source IP address of the MLD packets in multicast VLAN 1 as fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan-config 1 replace-sourceip fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001 40.15 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan Description The ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command is used to enable the MLD Querier function. To disable this function, use no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan vlan-id no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan vlan-id Parameter vlan-id —— The VLAN that enables the MLD querier function, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Enable MLD Querier function on VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2 443 40.16 ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan (general query) Description The ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command is used to configure the parameters for MLD Snooping Querier to send a general query frame. To return to the default configuration, use no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan vlan-id { query-interval interval | max-response-time response-time | general-query source-ip ip-addr } no ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan vlan-id { query-interval | max-response-time | general-query source-ip } Parameter vlan-id —— VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. interval —— The time interval to send a general query frame by MLD Snooping Querier, ranging from 10 to 300 (Seconds). By default, it is 60 seconds. response-time —— The maximal time for the host to respond to a general query frame, ranging from 1 to 25 (Seconds). By default, it is 10 Seconds. ip-addr —— The source IP of the general query frame sent by MLD Snooping Querier. It should not be a multicast IP or a broadcast IP. By default, it is fe80::02ff:ffff:fe00:0001. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 444 Example For VLAN 2, specify its query-interval as 200 seconds, and the response-time as 20 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2 query-interval 200 T2600G-28TS(config)#ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2 max-response-time 20 40.17 ipv6 mld snooping max-groups Description The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that a port can join in. The ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action is used to configure the action that the port takes when it receives an MLD report message and the maximum number of entries is in the forwarding table. To remove the maximum group limitation and return to the default of no limitation on the specified port, use the no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups command. To return to the default action of dropping the report, use the no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action command. These commands only apply to the dynamic multicast groups. Syntax ipv6 mld snooping max-groups [ maxgroup ] ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action { drop | replace } no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups no ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action Parameter maxgroup —— Specify the maximum numbers of groups that the port can join. It ranges from 0 to 1000 and the default value is 1000. 445 drop —— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the port will not join any new multicast group. replace —— When the number of the dynamic multicast groups that a port joins has exceeded the max-group, the newly joined multicast group will replace an existing multicast group with the lowest multicast group address. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the maximum numbers of groups that ports 1/0/2-5 can join as 10, and configure the throttling action as replace: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface range gigabitEthernet 1/0/2-5 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups 10 T2600G-28TS(config-if-range)#ipv6 mld snooping max-groups action replace 40.18 ipv6 mld profile Description The ipv6 mld profile command is used to create the configuration profile. To delete the corresponding profile, use no ipv6 mld profile command. Syntax ipv6 mld profile id no ipv6 mld profile id Parameter id —— Specify the id of the configuration profile, ranging from 1 to 999. 446 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Create the profile 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 40.19 deny Description The deny command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as deny. Syntax deny Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as deny: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#deny 40.20 permit Description The permit command is used to configure the filtering mode of profile as permit. 447 Syntax permit Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the filtering mode of profile 1 as permit: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#permit 40.21 range Description The range command is used to configure the range of the profile’s filtering multicast address. To delete the corresponding filtering multicast address, use no range command. A profile contains 16 filtering IP-range entries at most. Syntax range start-ip end-ip no range start-ip end-ip Parameter start-ip —— Start IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry.. end-ip —— End IPv6 multicast address of the filter entry. Command Mode Profile Configuration Mode 448 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Configure one of the filter multicast address entry as range ff80::1234 to ff80::1235 in profile 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 mld profile 1 T2600G-28TS(config-igmp-profile)#range ff80::1234 ff80::1235 40.22 ipv6 mld filter Description The ipv6 mld filter command is used to bind the specified profile to the interface. To delete the binding, use no ipv6 mld filter command. Syntax ipv6 mld filter profile-id no ipv6 mld filter Parameter profile-id —— Specify the profile ID, ranging from 1 to 999. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Bind profile 1 to interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ipv6 mld filter 1 449 40.23 clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics Description The clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics command is used to clear the statistics of the MLD packets. Syntax clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the statistics of the MLD packets: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ipv6 mld snooping statistics 40.24 show ipv6 mld snooping Description The show ipv6 mld snooping command is used to display the global configuration of MLD Snooping. Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of MLD Snooping: 450 T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping 40.25 show ipv6 mld snooping interface Description The show ipv6 mld snooping interface command is used to display the port configuration of MLD snooping. Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ gigabitEthernet [ port | port-list ] ] { basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat } show ipv6 mld snooping interface [ port-channel [ port-channel-id ] ] { basic-config | max-groups } Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. basic-config | max-groups | packet-stat —— The related configuration information selected to display. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the MLD baisic configuration configuration of all ports and port channels: T2600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface basic-config Display the MLD basic configuration of port 1/0/2: 451 T2600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 basic-config Display the MLD packet statistics of ports 1/0/1-4: T2600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1-4 packet-stat 40.26 show ipv6 mld snooping vlan Description The show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command is used to display VLAN information of MLD Snooping. Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping vlan [ vlan-id ] Parameter vlan-id —— The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display all of the VLAN information: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping vlan 40.27 show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan Description The show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan command is used to display the Multicast VLAN configuration. 452 Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the Multicast VLAN configuration: T2600G-28TS# show ipv6 mld snooping multi-vlan 40.28 show ipv6 mld snooping groups Description The show ipv6 mld snooping groups command is used to display multicast groups. Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping groups [ vlan { vlan-id } ] [ ipv6_multicast_addr | count | dynamic | dynamic count | static | static count ] Parameter vlan-id ——The VLAN ID selected to display the information of all multicast items. ipv6_multicast_addr —— IPv6 address of the multicast group. count—— The numbers of all multicast groups. dynamic—— Display dynamic multicast groups. dynamic count—— The numbers of all dynamic multicast groups. static—— Display static multicast groups. static count—— The numbers of all static multicast groups. 453 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display all of the multicast groups: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping groups 40.29 show ipv6 mld snooping querier Description The show ipv6 mld snooping querier command is used to display the Querier configuration of VLAN. Syntax show ipv6 mld snooping querier [ vlan vlan-id ] Parameter vlan-id ——The VLAN ID selected to display, ranging from 1 to 4094. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display all Querier information: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld snooping querier 454 40.30 show ipv6 mld profile Description The show ipv6 mld profile command is used to display the configuration information of all the profiles or a specific profile. Syntax show ipv6 mld profile [ id ] Parameter id —— Specify the ID of the profile, ranging from 1 to 999. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration information of all profiles: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 mld profile 455 Chapter 41 SNMP Commands SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) functions are used to manage the network devices for a smooth communication, which can facilitate the network administrators to monitor the network nodes and implement the proper operation. 41.1 snmp-server Description The snmp-server command is used to enable the SNMP function. By default, it is disabled. To return to the default configuration, use no snmp-server command. Syntax snmp-server no snmp-server Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the SNMP function: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server 41.2 snmp-server view Description The snmp-server view command is used to add View. To delete the corresponding View, use no snmp-server view command. The OID (Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of 456 the switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set of the OIDs. The SNMP View is created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects. Syntax snmp-server view name mib-oid { include | exclude } no snmp-server view name mib-oid Parameter name —— The entry name of View, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Each View includes several entries with the same name. mib-oid —— MIB Object ID. It is the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of View, ranging from 1 to 61 characters. include | exclude —— View Type, with include and exclude options. They represent the view entry can/cannot be managed by the SNMP management station individually. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Add a View named view1, configuring the OID as 1.3.6.1.6.3.20, and this OID can be managed by the SNMP management station: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server view view1 1.3.6.1.6.3.20 include 41.3 snmp-server group Description The snmp-server group command is used to manage and configure the SNMP group. To delete the corresponding SNMP group, use no snmp-server 457 group command. SNMP v3 provides the VACM (View-based Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based Security Model) mechanisms for authentication. The users in the SNMP Group can manage the device via the Read View, Write View and Notify View. And the authentication mode and the privacy mode guarantee the high security for the communication between the management station and the managed device. Syntax snmp-server group name [ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ read read-view ] [ write write-view ] [ notify notify-view ] no snmp-server group name smode { v1 | v2c | v3 } slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv } Parameter name ——The SNMP Group name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The Group Name, Security Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group. These three items of the Users in one group should be the same. smode —— Security Model, with v1, v2c and v3 options. They represent SNMP v1, SNMP v2c and SNMP v3. slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv (authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption). By default, the Security Level is noAuthNoPriv. There is no need to configure this in SNMP v1 Mode and SNMP v2c Mode. read-view —— Select the View to be the Read View. The management access is restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP View. write-view —— Select the View to be the Write View. The management access is writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP View. The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View can be read and modified. notify-view —— Select the View to be the Notify View. The management station can receive notification messages of the assigned SNMP view generated by the switch's SNMP agent. 458 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Add a group, and configure the name as group 1, the Security Model as SNMP v3, the security level as authNoPriv, the management access to the assigned View viewDefault as read-write, besides the notification messages sent by View viewDefault can be received by Management station: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev authNoPriv read viewDefault write viewDefault notify viewDefault Delete group 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# no snmp-server group group1 smode v3 slev authNoPriv 41.4 snmp-server user Description The snmp-server user command is used to add User. To delete the corresponding User, use no snmp-server user command. The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software. The User and its Group have the same security level and access right. Syntax snmp-server user name { local | remote } group-name [ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ cmode { none | MD5 | SHA }] [ cpwd confirm-pwd ] [ emode { none | DES }] [ epwd encrypt-pwd ] no snmp-server user name Parameter name —— User Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. 459 local | remote —— User Type, with local and remote options. Local indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP engine, while remote means that the user is connected to a remote SNMP engine. group-name —— The Group Name of the User. The User is classified to the corresponding Group according to its Group Name, Security Model and Security Level. smode —— The Security Model of the User, with v1, v2c and v3 options. By default, the option is v1. The Security Model of the User must be the same with that of the Group which the User belongs to. slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv (authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption). By default, the option is “noAuthNoPriv”. The Security Level of the User must be the same with that of the Group which the User belongs to. cmode —— The Authentication Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none, MD5 and SHA options. None indicates no authentication method is used, MD5 indicates the port authentication is performed via HMAC-MD5 algorithm and SHA indicates the port authentication is performed via SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm). SHA authentication mode has a higher security than MD5 mode. By default, the Authentication Mode is “none”. confirm-pwd —— Authentication Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form. emode —— The Privacy Mode of the SNMP v3 User, with none and DES options. None indicates no privacy method is used, and DES indicates DES encryption method is used. By default, the Privacy Mode is “none”. encrypt-pwd —— Privacy Password, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. This password in the configuration file will be displayed in the symmetric encrypted form. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 460 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Add Local User admin to Group group2, and configure the Security Model of the user as v3, the Security Level of the group as authPriv, the Authentication Mode of the user as MD5, the Authentication Password as 11111, the Privacy Mode as DES, and the Privacy Password as 22222: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server user admin local group2 smode v3 slev authPriv cmode MD5 cpwd 11111 emode DES epwd 22222 41.5 snmp-server community Description The snmp-server community command is used to add Community. To delete the corresponding Community, use no snmp-server community command. SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication. The community name can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password. Syntax snmp-server community name { read-only | read-write } mib-view no snmp-server community name Parameter name —— Community Name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. read-only | read-write —— The access rights of the community, with read-only and read-write options. mib-view —— The MIB View for the community to access. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 461 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Add community public, and the community has read-write management right to View viewDefault: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server community public read-write viewDefault 41.6 snmp-server host Description The snmp-server host command is used to add Notification. To delete the corresponding Notification, use no snmp-server host command. Syntax snmp-server host ip udp-port user-name [ smode { v1 | v2c | v3 }] [ slev { noAuthNoPriv | authNoPriv | authPriv }] [ type { trap | inform }] [ retries retries ] [ timeout timeout ] no snmp-server host ip user-name Parameter ip —— The IP Address of the management Host. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported, for example 192.168.0.100 or fe80::1234. udp-port —— UDP port, which is used to send notifications. The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification sending. It ranges from 1 to 65535. user-name —— The User name of the management station. smode —— The Security Model of the management station, with v1, v2c and v3 options. By default, the option is v1. 462 slev —— The Security Level of SNMP v3 Group. There are three options, including noAuthNoPriv (no authorization and no encryption), authNoPriv (authorization and no encryption) and authPriv (authorization and encryption). By default, the option is “noAuthNoPriv”. type —— The type of the notifications, with trap and inform options. Trap indicates traps are sent, while inform indicates informs are sent. The inform type has a higher security than the trap type and resend and timeout need to be configured if you select this option. You can only select the trap type in Security Model v1. By default, the type of the notifications is “trap”. retries —— The amount of times the switch retries an inform request, ranging from 1 to 255. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the response from the management station during the Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times. timeout —— The maximum time for the switch to wait for the response from the management station before resending a request, ranging from 1 to 3600 in seconds. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP address of the management Host as 192.168.0.146, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.0.146 162 admin smode v2c type inform retries 100 timeout 1000 463 Add a Notification entry, and configure the IP Address of the management Host as fe80::1234, the UDP port as 162, the User name of the management station as admin, the Security Model of the management station as v2c, the type of the notifications as inform, the maximum time for the switch to wait as 1000 seconds, and the retries time as 100: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server host fe80::1234 162 admin smode v2c type inform retries 100 timeout 1000 41.7 snmp-server engineID Description The snmp-server engineID command is used to configure the local and remote engineID of the switch. To restore to the default setting, use no snmp-server engineID command. Syntax snmp-server engineID { [ local local-engineID ] [ remote remote-engineID ] } no snmp-server engineID Parameter local-engineID —— Local Engine ID for local clients. The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile. remote-engineID —— Remote Engine ID for the switch. The Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine on the remote device which receives informs from the switch. Its length ranges from 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters, which must be even number meanwhile. The snmp-server engineID will be disabled if the local and remote are both not configured. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 464 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the local engineID as 1234567890, and the remote engineID as abcdef123456: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server engineID local 1234567890 remote abcdef123456 41.8 snmp-server traps snmp Description The snmp-server traps snmp command is used to enable SNMP standard traps which include four types: linkup, linkdown, warmstart and coldstart. To disable the sending of SNMP standard traps, use no snmp-server traps snmp command. Syntax snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart | auth-failure ] no snmp-server traps snmp [ linkup | linkdown | warmstart | coldstart | auth-failure ] Parameter linkup —— Enable linkup trap. It is sent when port status changes from linkdown to linkup. By default, it is enabled. linkdown ——Enable linkdown trap. It is sent when port status changes from linkup to linkdown. By default, it is enabled. warmstart —— Enable warmstart trap. It is sent upon SNMP function reboot. By default, it is enabled. coldstart —— Enable coldstart trap. It is sent upon switch reboot. By default, it is enabled. 465 auth-failure —— Enable the auth-failure trap. It is sent when a received SNMP request fails the authentication. By default, it is enabled. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable SNMP standard linkup trap for the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps snmp linkup 41.9 snmp-server traps link-status Description The snmp-server traps link-status command is used to enable SNMP link status trap for the specified port. To disable the sending of SNMP link status trap, use no snmp-server traps link-status command. Syntax snmp-server traps link-status no snmp-server traps link-status Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable SNMP link status trap for port 3: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/3 466 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# snmp-server traps link-status 41.10 snmp-server traps Description The snmp-server traps command is used to enable SNMP extended traps. To disable the sending of SNMP extended traps, use no snmp-server traps command. Syntax snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree | memory } no snmp-server traps { bandwidth-control | cpu | flash | lldp remtableschange | lldp topologychange | loopback-detection | storm-control | spanning-tree | memory } Parameter bandwidth-control —— Enable bandwidth-control trap. It is sent when the rate limit function is enabled and the bandwidth exceeds the predefined value. cpu —— Allow CPU-related trap. It is sent when CPU usage exceeds the predefined threshold. By default, the CPU usage threshold of the switch is 80%. flash —— Enable flash trap. It is sent when flash is modified during operations such as backup, reset, firmware upgrade, configuration import, etc. lldp remtableschange ——A lldp RemTablesChange notification is sent when the value of lldp StatsRemTableLastChangeTime changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to trigger LLDP remote systems table maintenance polls. lldp topologychange —— a notification generated by the local device to sense the change in the topology that indicates a new remote device attached to a local port, or a remote device disconnected or moved from one port to another. 467 loopback-detection —— Enable loopback-detection trap. It is sent when the switch detects loopback or loopback is cleared. storm-control —— Enable storm-control trap. It is sent when the multicast or broadcast rate exceeds the predefined value. spanning-tree —— Enable spanning-tree trap. It is sent when the port forwarding status changes or the port receives TCN packet or packet with TC fport-channel-. memory —— Enable memory trap. It is sent when memory usage exceeds 80%. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable SNMP extended bandwidth-control trap for the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps bandwidth-control 41.11 snmp-server traps ddm Description The snmp-server traps ddm command is used to enable SNMP DDM traps. DDM function is used to monitor the status of the SFP modules inserted into the SFP ports on the switch. To disable the sending of SNMP DDM traps, use no snmp-server traps ddm command. Syntax snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power ] 468 no snmp-server traps ddm [ temperature | voltage | bias_current | tx_power | rx_power ] Parameter temperature —— Enable DDM Temperature trap. It is sent when the DDM temperature value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. voltage —— Enable DDM Voltage trap. It is sent when the DDM voltage value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. bias_current —— Enable DDM Bias Current trap. It is sent when the DDM bias current value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. tx_power —— Enable DDM Tx Power trap. It is sent when the DDM Tx power value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. rx_power —— Enable DDM Rx Power trap. It is sent when the DDM Rx power value exceeds the alarm threshold or warning threshold. User guidelines The snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to enable all the types of DDM traps. And the no snmp-server traps ddm command without any parameter is used to disable all the types of DDM traps. For more instructions about the alarm threshold or warning threshold, refer to Chapter 34 DDM Commands. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Example Enable all the SNMP DDM traps for the switch: T2500-28TC(config)# snmp-server traps ddm 469 41.12 snmp-server traps vlan Description The snmp-server traps vlan command is used to enable SNMP extended VLAN-related traps which include two types: create and delete. To disable this function, use no snmp-server traps vlan command. Syntax snmp-server traps vlan [ create | delete ] no snmp-server traps vlan [create | delete ] Parameter create —— Enable VLAN-created trap. It is sent when new VLAN is created successfully. delete —— Enable VLAN-deleted traps. It is sent when VLAN is deleted successfully. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable all SNMP extended VLAN-related traps for the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan Enable VLAN-created trap only for the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps vlan create 470 41.13 snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop Description The snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop command is used to enable the illegal DHCP server trap feature. The switch will send an SNMP trap message when untrusted port receives DHCP Server packets. To disable this feature, use no snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop command. Syntax snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop no snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the illegal DHCP server trap feature for the switch: T2600G-28TS(config)# snmp-server traps security dhcp-snoop 41.14 rmon history Description The rmon history command is used to configure the history sample entry. To return to the default configuration, use no rmon history command. RMON (Remote Monitoring), basing on SNMP architecture, functions to monitor the network. History Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups. After a history group is configured, the switch collects network statistics information periodically, based on which the management station can monitor network effectively. 471 Syntax rmon history index interface gigabitEthernet port [ interval seconds ] [ owner owner-name ] [ buckets number ] no rmon history index Parameter index —— The index number of the entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3,5. port ——The Ethernet port number. seconds —— The interval to take samplings from the port, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800. owner-name —— The owner of the history sample entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “monitor”. number —— The maximum number of buckets desired for the RMON history group of statistics, ranging from 1 to 130. The default is 50 buckets. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the sample port as Gi1/0/2 and the sample interval as 100 seconds for the entry 1-3: T2600G-28TS(config)# rmon history 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 interval 100 owner owner1 472 41.15 rmon event Description The rmon event command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON Event. To return to the default configuration, use no rmon event command. Event Group, as one of the commonly used RMON Groups, is used to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is detected. Syntax rmon event index [ user user-name ] [ description descript ] [ type { none | log | notify | log-notify }] [ owner owner-name ] no rmon event index Parameter index —— The index number of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 12. You can only select one entry for each command. user-name —— The name of the User to which the event belongs, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “public”. descript —— The description of the event, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is empty. type —— The event type, with none, log, notify and both options. None indicates no processing, log indicates logging the event, notify indicates sending trap messages to the management station, and both indicates logging the event and sending trap messages to the management station. owner-name —— The owner of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “monitor”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 473 Example Configure the user name of entry 1, 2, 3 and 4 as user1, the description of the event as description1, the type of event as log and the owner of the event as owner1: T2600G-28TS(config)# rmon event 1-4 user user1 description description1 type log owner owner1 41.16 rmon alarm Description The rmon alarm command is used to configure SNMP-RMON Alarm Management. To return to the default configuration, use no rmon alarm command. Alarm Group is one of the commonly used RMON Groups. RMON alarm management allows monitoring the specific alarm variables. When the value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event is generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way. Syntax rmon alarm index { stats-index sindex } [ alarm-variable { revbyte | revpkt | bpkt | mpkt | crc-lign | undersize | oversize | jabber | collision | 64 | 65-127 | 128-511 | 512-1023 | 1024-10240 }] [ s-type { absolute | delta} ] [ rising-threshold r-hold ] [ rising-event-index r-event] [ falling-threshold f-hold] [ falling-event-index f-event] [ a-type {rise | fall | all} ] [ owner owner-name ] [ interval interval] no rmon alarm index Parameter index —— The index number of the Alarm Management entry, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3,5. sindex —— Specify the statistics index. alarm-variable —— The alarm variable. By default, the option is revbyte. 474 s-type —— Sample Type, which is the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds. There are two options, absolute and delta. Absolute indicates comparing the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. Delta indicates subtracting the last sampled value from the current value, and then comparing the difference in the values with the threshold. By default, the Sample Type is absolute. r-hold —— The rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold alarm, ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100. r-event —— Rise Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising Threshold. It ranges from 1 to 12. f-hold —— The falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold alarm, ranging from 1 to 2147483647. By default, it is 100. f-event —— Fall Event, which is the index of the corresponding event which will be triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling Threshold. It ranges from 1 to 12. a-type —— Alarm Type, with rise, fall and all options. Rise indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold, fall indicates that the alarm event will be triggered when the sampled value is under the Falling Threshold, and all indicates that the alarm event will be triggered either the sampled value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling Threshold. By default, the Alarm Type is all. owner-name —— The owner of the entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is monitor. interval —— The alarm interval time, ranging from 10 to 3600 in seconds. By default, it is 1800. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 475 Example Configure rmon alarm entries 1-3 binding with statistics entry 2, the owners as owner1 and the alarm intervals as 100 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#rmon alarm 1-3 stats-index 2 owner owner1 interval 100 41.17 rmon statistics Description The rmon statistics command is used to configure the entries of SNMP-RMON statistics. To delete the corresponding entry, use no rmon statistics command. The maximum supported entries are 1000. Syntax rmon statistics index interface gigabitEthernet port [ owner owner-name] [ status { underCreation | valid }] no rmon statistics index Parameter index —— The index number of the statistics entry, ranging from 1 to 65535, in the format of 1-3,5. port —— The statistics port number, in the format of 1/0/1. owner-name —— The creator of the event entry, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. By default, it is “monitor”. status —— The status of the statistics entry, either “underCreation” or “valid”. “underCreation” means this entry won’t take effect until it is modified to “valid”; “valid” means this entry takes effect immediately after it is created. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 476 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the statistics entries 1-3 with the statistics port as 1/0/1, owner as owner1 and status as valid: T2600G-28TS(config)#rmon statistics 1-3 interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 owner owner1 status valid 41.18 show snmp-server Description The show snmp-server command is used to display SNMP configuration globally. Syntax show snmp-server Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display SNMP configuration globally: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server 41.19 show snmp-server view Description The show snmp-server view command is used to display the View table. 477 Syntax show snmp-server view Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the View table: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server view 41.20 show snmp-server group Description The show snmp-server group command is used to display the Group table. Syntax show snmp-server group Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the Group table: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server group 478 41.21 show snmp-server user Description The show snmp-server user command is used to display the User table. Syntax show snmp-server user Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the User table: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server user 41.22 show snmp-server community Description The show snmp-server community command is used to display the Community table. Syntax show snmp-server community Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 479 Example Display the Community table: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server community 41.23 show snmp-server host Description The show snmp-server host command is used to display the Host table. Syntax show snmp-server host Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the Host table: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server host 41.24 show snmp-server engineID Description The show snmp-server engineID command is used to display the engineID of the SNMP. Syntax show snmp-server engineID Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 480 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the engineID: T2600G-28TS# show snmp-server engineID 41.25 show rmon history Description The show rmon history command is used to display the configuration of the history sample entry. Syntax show rmon history [ index ] Parameter index —— The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all history sample entries is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration of all history sample entries: T2600G-28TS# show rmon history 481 41.26 show rmon event Description The show rmon event command is used to display the configuration of SNMP-RMON Event. Syntax show rmon event [ index ] Parameter index —— The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all SNMP-RMON enabled entries is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the Event configuration of entry1-4: T2600G-28TS# show rmon event 1-4 41.27 show rmon alarm Description The show rmon alarm command is used to display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry. Syntax show rmon alarm [ index ] 482 Parameter index —— The index number of the entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 12, in the format of 1-3, 5. You can select more than one entry for each command. By default, the configuration of all Alarm Management entries is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration of the Alarm Management entry 1-2: T2600G-28TS# show rmon alarm 1-2 41.28 show rmon statistics Description The show rmon statistics command is used to display the configuration of the specified statistics entry. Syntax show rmon statistics [ index ] Parameter index —— The index number of the statistics entry selected to display the configuration, ranging from 1 to 65535. By default, the configuration of all statistics entries is displayed. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 483 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the configuration of the statistics entry 1: T2600G-28TS#show rmon statistics 1 484 Chapter 42 LLDP Commands LLDP function enables network devices to advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same LAN. The information of the LLDP devices in the LAN can be stored by its neighbor in a standard MIB, so it is possible for the information to be accessed by a Network Management System (NMS) using SNMP. 42.1 lldp Description The lldp command is used to enable LLDP function. To disable the LLDP function, use no lldp command. Syntax lldp no lldp Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable LLDP function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#lldp 42.2 lldp forward_message Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support this command. 485 Description The lldp forward_message command is used to enable the switch to forward LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled. To disable the LLDP messages forwarding function, use no lldp forward_message command. Syntax lldp forward_message no lldp forward_message Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the switch to forward LLDP messages when LLDP function is disabled globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#lldp forward_message 42.3 lldp hold-multiplier Description The lldp hold-multiplier command is used to configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by the actual TTL value used in the sending LLDPDU. TTL = Hold Multiplier * Transmit Interval. To return to the default configuration, use no lldp hold-multiplier command. Syntax lldp hold-multiplier multiplier no lldp hold-multiplier 486 Parameter multiplier —— Configure the Hold Multiplier parameter. It ranges from 2 to 10. By default, it is 4. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify Hold Multiplier as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)#lldp hold-multiplier 5 42.4 lldp timer Description The lldp timer command is used to configure the parameters about transmission. To return to the default configuration, use no lldp timer command. Syntax lldp timer { tx-interval tx-interval | tx-delay tx-delay | reinit-delay reinit-delay | notify-interval notify-interval | fast-count fast-count } no lldp timer { tx-interval | tx-delay | reinit-delay | notify-interval | fast-count } Parameter tx-interval —— Configure the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors. The value ranges from 5 to 32768 and the default value is 30 seconds. tx-delay —— Configure a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently. By default, it is 2 seconds. 487 reinit-delay —— This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted. The value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3. notify-interval —— Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local device to network management system. The value ranges from 5 to 3600 and the default value is 5 seconds. fast-count —— When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or Rx_Only) to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled, that is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and several LLDPDUs will be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs equals this parameter). The value ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 3. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the Transmit Interval of LLDPDU as 45 seconds and Trap message to NMS as 120 seconds: T2600G-28TS(config)#lldp timer tx-interval 45 T2600G-28TS(config)#lldp timer notify-interval 120 42.5 lldp receive Description The lldp receive command is used to enable the designated port to receive LLDPDU. To disable the function, use no lldp receive command. Syntax lldp receive no lldp receive 488 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to receive LLDPDU: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp receive 42.6 lldp transmit Description The lldp transmit command is used to enable the designated port to transmit LLDPDU. To disable the function, use no lldp transmit command. Syntax lldp transmit no lldp transmit Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1 to transmit LLDPDU: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 489 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp transmit 42.7 lldp snmp-trap Description The lldp snmp-trap command is used to enable the port’s SNMP notification. If enabled, the port will notify the trap event to network management system. To disable the ports' SNMP notification, use no lldp snmp-trap command. Syntax lldp snmp-trap no lldp snmp-trap Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the SNMP notification for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#lldp snmp-trap 42.8 lldp tlv-select Description The lldp tlv-select command is used to configure TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU. To exclude TLVs, use no lldp tlv-select command. By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU. 490 Syntax lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] } no lldp tlv-select { [ port-description ] [ system-capability ] [ system-description ] [ system-name ] [ management-address ] [ port-vlan ] [ protocol-vlan ] [ vlan-name ] [ link-aggregation ] [ mac-phy-cfg ] [ max-frame-size ] [ power ] [ all ] } Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Exclude “management-address” and “port-vlan-id” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no lldp tlv-select management-address port-vlan 42.9 lldp management address Description The lldp management address command is used to configure the port‘s management address to be included in management address TLV. The NMS uses management addresses to identify the devices. To delete the port‘s management address, use no lldp management address command. Syntax lldp management address { ip-address } 491 no lldp management address Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the port‘s management address as 192.168.1.100 for Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# lldp management address 192.168.0.100 42.10 lldp med-fast-count Description The lldp med-fast-count command is used to configure the number of the LLDP-MED frames that will be sent out. When LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is activated, multiple LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based on this parameter. The default value is 4. To return to the default configuration, use no lldp med-fast-count command. Syntax lldp med-fast-count count no lldp med-fast-count Parameter count —— Configure the Fast Start Count parameter. It ranges from 1 to 10. By default, it is 4. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 492 Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify Fast Start Count as 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# lldp med-fast-count 5 42.11 lldp med-status Description The lldp med-status command is used to enable the LLDP-MED feature for the corresponding port. After the LLDP-MED feature is enabled, the port's Admin Status will be changed to Tx&Rx. To disable the LLDP-MED feature for the corresponding port, use no lldp med-status command. Syntax lldp med-status no lldp med-status Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the LLDP-MED feature for port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# lldp med-status 493 42.12 lldp med-tlv-select Description The lldp med-tlv-select command is used to configure LLDP-MED TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU for the corresponding port. To exclude LLDP-MED TLVs, use no lldp med-tlv-select command. By default, All TLVs are included in outgoing LLDPDU. Syntax lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management] [location] [network-policy] [power-management] [all] } no lldp med-tlv-select { [inventory-management] [location] [network-policy] [power-management] [all] } Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Exclude “network policy” and “inventory” TLVs in LLDPDU outgoing from port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no lldp med-tlv-select network-policy inventorymanagement 494 42.13 lldp med-location Description The lldp med-location command is used to configure the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port. Syntax lldp med-location { emergency-number identifier | civic-address [ [ language language ] [ province-state province-state ] [ county county] [city city ] [ street street ] [ house-number house-number ] [name name ] [ postal-zipcode postal-zipcode ] [ room-number room-number ] [ post-office-box post-office-box ] [ additional additional ] [ country-code country-code ] [ what { dhcp-server | endpoint | switch } ] ] } Parameter emergency-number —— Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier, which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. The length of this field ranges from 10 to 25 characters. civic-address —— The civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub-fields of the DHCP option for civic Address based Location Configuration Information as specified by IETF. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the civic address in the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of port 1/0/2. Configure the language as English and city as London: T2700-28TQ (config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 495 T2700-28TQ(config-if)# lldp med-location civic-address language English city London 42.14 show lldp Description The show lldp command is used to display the global configuration of LLDP. Syntax show lldp Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of LLDP: T2600G-28TS#show lldp 42.15 show lldp interface Description The show lldp interface command is used to display LLDP configuration of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP configuration of all the ports will be displayed. Syntax show lldp interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. 496 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the LLDP configuration of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS#show lldp interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 42.16 show lldp local-information interface Description The show lldp local-information interface command is used to display the LLDP information of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP information of all the ports will be displayed. Syntax show lldp local-information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the LLDP information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS#show lldp local-information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 497 42.17 show lldp neighbor-information interface Description The show lldp neighbor-information interface command is used to display the neighbor information of the corresponding port. By default, the neighbor information of all the ports will be displayed. Syntax show lldp neighbor-information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the neighbor information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS#show lldp neighbor-information interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 42.18 show lldp traffic interface Description The show lldp traffic interface command is used to display the LLDP statistic information between the local device and neighbor device of the corresponding port. By default, the LLDP statistic information of all the ports will be displayed. Syntax show lldp traffic interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] 498 Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the LLDP statistic information of Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS#show lldp traffic interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 499 Chapter 43 sFlow Commands Note: T2600G-18TS doesn’t support sFlow feature. sFlow (Sampled Flow) is a technology for accurately monitoring network traffic at high speeds. The sFlow monitoring system consists of an sFlow agent (embedded in a switch or router or in a standalone probe) and a central sFlow collector. The sFlow agent is a virtual entity using sampling technology to capture traffic statistics from the device it is monitoring. The sFlow collector can be a host receiving sFlow datagrams from the sFlow agent. The sFlow feature is implemented as follows: the sFlow sampler take samples of traffic statistics and send sFlow datagrams to the sFlow agent for processing. The sFlow agent will forward sFlow datagrams to the sFlow collector for analysis. The analytic results can be displayed on the sFlow collector. 43.1 sflow address Description The sflow address command is used to configure the sFlow agent’s IP address. To delete the configured address, use no sflow address command. Syntax sflow address { ipv4-addr } no sflow address { ipv4-addr } Parameter ipv4-addr ——The IP address of the sFlow agent. The type of the IP address should be IPv4. For example, you can set the switch’s management IP as the IP address of the sFlow agent. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 500 Example Configure the sFlow agent with the IP address as 192.168.0.1: T2600G-28TS(config)#sflow address 192.168.0.1 43.2 sflow enable Description The sflow enable command is used to enable sFlow function. To disable the sFlow function, use no sflow enable command. Syntax sflow enable no sflow enable Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines A valid agent address should be assigned to the sFlow agent embedded in the switch before you enable the sFlow function. Example Enable sFlow function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)#sflow enable 43.3 sflow collector collector-ID Description The sflow collector collector-ID command is used to configure the parameters about the sFlow collector. 501 Syntax sflow collector collector-ID value { [descript descript ] | [ ip ip ] | [ port port ] | [ maxData maxData ] | [ timeout timeout ] } Parameter value —— The ID of the sFlow collector you desire to configure. The value ranges from 1 to 4. descript ——Give a description to the sFlow collector, which contains 16 characters at most. ip ——The IP address of the sFlow collector. The type of the IP address should be IPv4, for example 192.168.0.100. port ——The number of the udp port which is selected for the sFlow collector. maxData ——Specify the maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. The value ranges from 300 to 1400 and the default value is 300 bytes. timeout ——Specify the aging time of the sFlow collector, ranging from 0 to 2000000 seconds. When the timeout is set to 0, it means the life cycle of the collector is infinite. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the ip of the sFlow collector 1 as 192.168.0.100, the port as 3000: T2600G-28TS(config)# sflow collector collector-ID 1 ip 192.168.0.100 T2600G-28TS(config)# sflow collector collector-ID 1 port 3000 502 43.4 sflow sampler Description The sflow sampler command is used to configure the parameters about the sFlow sampler. Syntax sflow sampler { [ collector-ID value ] | [ ingRate ingress-rate ] [ egRate egress-rate ] | [ maxHeader maxHeader ] } Parameter value —— The ID of the sFlow collector which the sFlow sampler will send sFlow datagrams to. The value ranges from 0 to 4. When the value is zero, it means no collector is selected. ingress-rate ——Specify the ingress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler. When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to skip before the next sample is taken. The value ranges from 1024 to 65535 and the default value is 0 which means no packets will be sampled. egress-rate ——Specify the egress sampling frequency of the sFlow sampler. When a sample is taken, the value indicates how many packets to skip before the next sample is taken. The value ranges from 1024 to 65535 and the default value is 0 which means no packets will be sampled. maxHeader ——Specify the maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet. The value ranges from 18 to 256 and the default value is 128 bytes. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement Only Admin and Operator level users have access to these commands. 503 Example Configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1 as the sFlow sampler: specify the Collector-ID as 1, the ingress rate as 1024: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#sflow sampler collector-ID 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#sflow sampler ingRate 1024 43.5 show sflow global Description The show sflow global command is used to display the global configuration of sFlow. Syntax show sflow global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of sFlow: T2600G-28TS#show sflow global 43.6 show sflow collector Description The show sflow collector command is used to display the global configuration of the sFlow collector. 504 Syntax show sflow collector Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of the sFlow collector: T2600G-28TS#show sflow collector 43.7 show sflow sampler Description The show sflow sampler command is used to display the global configuration of the sFlow sampler. Syntax show sflow sampler Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the global configuration of the sFlow sampler: T2600G-28TS#show sflow sampler 505 Chapter 44 Static Routes Commands 44.1 interface vlan Description This interface vlan command is used to create the VLAN interface. To delete the specified VLAN interface, use the no interface vlan command. Syntax interface vlan { vid } no interface vlan { vid } Parameter vid —— The ID of the VLAN. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the VLAN interface 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 2 44.2 interface loopback Description This interface loopback command is used to create the loopback interface. To delete the specified loopback interface, use the no interface loopback command. 506 Syntax interface loopback { id } no interface loopback { id } Parameter id —— The ID of the loopback interface, ranging from 1 to 64. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the loopback interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface loopback 1 44.3 switchport Description This switchport command is used to switch the Layer 3 interface into the Layer 2 port. To switch the Layer 2 port into the Layer 3 routed port, use the no switchport command. Syntax switchport no switchport Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) 507 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Switch the gigabitEthernet port 1/0/9 into the routed port: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport 44.4 interface range port-channel Description This interface range port-channel command is used to create multiple port-channel interfaces. Syntax interface range port-channel port-channel-list Parameter port-channel-list —— The list of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to 14, in the format of 1-3, 5. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the port-channel interfaces 1,3,4 and 5: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface port-channel 1,3-5 508 44.5 description Description This description command is used to add a description to the Layer 3 interface, including routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface and VLAN interface. To clear the description of the corresponding interface, use the no description command. Syntax description string no description Parameter string —— Content of an interface description, ranging from 1 to 32 characters. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a description system-if to the routed port 1/0/9 : T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport T2600G-28TS(config-if)# description system-if 44.6 shutdown Description This shutdown command is used to shut down the specified interface. The interface type include: routed port, port-channel interface, loopback interface 509 and VLAN interface. To enable the specified interface, use the no shutdown command. Syntax shutdown no shutdown Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Shut down the routed port 1/0/9 : T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/9 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# no switchport T2600G-28TS(config-if)# shutdown 44.7 interface port-channel Description This interface port-channel command is used to create the port-channel interface. To delete the specified port-channel interface, use the no interface port-channel command. Syntax interface port-channel { port-channel-id } no interface port-channel { port-channel-id } Parameter port-channel-id —— The ID of the port-channel interface, ranging from 1 to 14. 510 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the port-channel interface 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface port-channel 1 44.8 ip route Description This ip route command is configure the static route. To clear the corresponding entry, use the no ip route command. Syntax ip route { dest-address } { mask } { next-hop-address } [ distance ] no ip route { dest-address } { mask } { next-hop-address } Parameter dest-address —— The destination IP address. mask —— The subnet mask. next-hop-address —— The address of the next-hop. distance —— The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode 511 Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a static route with the destination IP address as 192.168.2.0, the subnet mask as 255.255.255.0 and the next-hop address as 192.168.0.2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip route 192.168.2.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.0.2 44.9 ipv6 routing Description This ipv6 routing command is enale the IPv6 routing feature globally. To diable IPv6 routing, use the no ipv6 routing command. Syntax ipv6 routing no ipv6 routing Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines For T2600G-18TS, before enable the IPv6 routing feature, you should configure the SDM template as "enterpriseV6" and save your configurations. For more information about SDM configuration, refer to sdm prefer. Example Enable IPv6 routing globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 routing 512 44.10 ipv6 route Description This ipv6 route command is configure the IPv6 static route. To clear the corresponding entry, use the no ipv6 route command. Syntax ipv6 route { ipv6-dest-address } { next-hop-address } [ distance ] no ipv6 route { ipv6-dest-address } { next-hop-address } Parameter ipv6-dest-address—— The IPv6 address of the destination network. next-hop-address —— The IPv6 address of the next-hop. distance —— The distance metric of this route, ranging from 1 to 255. The smaller the distance is, the higher the priority is. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create a static route with the destination network IP address as 3200::/64 and the next-hop address as 3100::1234: T2600G-28TS(config)# ipv6 route 3200::/64 3100::1234 44.11 show interface vlan Description The show interface vlan command is used to display the information of the specified interface VLAN. 513 Syntax show interface vlan vid Parameter vid —— The VLAN ID. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the information of VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#show interface vlan 2 44.12 show ip interface Description This show ip interface command is used to display the detailed information of the specified Layer 3 interface. Syntax show ip interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id | loopback id | vlan vlan-id ] Parameter port —— The port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Member ports in this port channel should all be routed ports. id —— The loopback interface ID. vlan-id —— The VLAN interface ID. 514 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the detailed information of the VLAN interface 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip interface vlan 2 44.13 show ip interface brief Description This show ip interface brief command is used to display the summary information of the Layer 3 interfaces. Syntax show ip interface brief Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the summary information of the Layer 3 interfaces: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip interface brief 44.14 show ip route Description This show ip route command is used to display the route entries of the specified type. 515 Syntax show ip route [ static | connected ] Parameter static | connected —— Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of route entries will be displayed. static: The static routes. connected: The connected routes. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the static routes: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip route static 44.15 show ip route specify Description This show ip route specify command is used to display the valid routing information to the specified IP address or network segments. Syntax show ip route specify { ip } [ mask ] [ longer-prefixes ] Parameter ip —— Specify the destination IP address. mask —— Specify the destination IP address together with the parameter ip. longer-prefixes —— Specify the destination subnets that match the network segment determined by the ip and mask parameters. 516 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the shortest route to 192.168.0.100: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.100 Look up the route entry with the destination as 192.168.0.0/24: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.0 Display the routes to all the subnets that belongs to 192.168.0.0/16: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip route specify 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0 longer-prefixes 44.16 show ip route summary Description This show ip route summary command is used to display the summary information of the route entries classified by their sources. Syntax show ip route summary Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the summary information of route entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip route summary 517 44.17 show ipv6 interface Description This command is used to display the configured IPv6 information of the management interface, including ipv6 function status, link-local address and global address, IPv6 multicast groups etc. Syntax show ipv6 interface Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IPv6 information of the management interface: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 interface 44.18 show ipv6 route Description This show ipv6 route command is used to display the IPv6 route entries of the specified type. Syntax show ipv6 route [ static | connected ] Parameter static | connected —— Specify the route type. If not specified, all types of route entries will be displayed. static: The static routes. connected: The connected routes. 518 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the IPv6 static routes: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 route static 44.19 show ipv6 route summary Description This show ipv6 route summary command is used to display the summary information of the IPv6 route entries classified by their sources. Syntax show ipv6 route summary Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the summary information of IPv6 route entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ipv6 route summary 519 Chapter 45 SDM Template Commands This chapter describes how to configure the Switch Database Management (SDM) templates to allocate hardware resources on the switch for different uses. 45.1 sdm prefer Description The sdm prefer command is used to configure the SDM template. The SDM template is used to allocate system resources to best support the features being used in your application. To return to use the default template, use the sdm prefer default command. The template change will takes effect after a reboot. Syntax sdm prefer { default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 } Parameter default —— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as “default”. enterpriseV4 —— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as “enterpriseV4”. enterpriseV6 —— Specify the SDM template used in the switch as “enterpriseV6”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the SDM template as enterpriseV4: T2600G-28TS(config)# sdm prefer enterpriseV4 520 45.2 show sdm prefer Description The show sdm prefer command is used to display resource allocation of the current SDM template in use, or the SDM templates that can be used. Syntax show sdm prefer { used | default | enterpriseV4 | enterpriseV6 } Parameter used —— Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and the template that will become active after a reboot. default —— Display the resource allocation of the default template. enterpriseV4 —— Display the resource allocation of the enterpriseV4 template. enterpriseV6 —— Display the resource allocation of the enterpriseV6 template. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the resource allocation of the template currently in use, and the template that will become active after a reboot: T2600G-28TS(config)#show sdm prefer used 521 Chapter 46 AAA Commands AAA stands for authentication, authorization and accounting. This feature is used to authenticate users trying to log in to the switch or trying to access the administrative level privilege. Applicable Access Application The authentication can be applied on the following access applications: Console, Telnet, SSH and HTTP. Authentication Method List A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. The switch supports Login List for users to gain access to the switch, and Enable List for normal users to gain administrative privileges. RADIUS/TACACS+ Server User can configure the RADIUS/TACACS+ servers for the connection between the switch and the server. Server Group User can define the authentication server group with up to several servers running the same secure protocols, either RADIUS or TACACS+. Users can set these servers in a preferable order, which is called the server group list. When a user tries to access the switch, the switch will ask the first server in the server group list for authentication. If no response is received, the second server will be queried, and so on. 46.1 aaa enable Description The aaa enable command is used to enable the AAA function globally. To disable the AAA function globally, use the no aaa enable command. The global AAA function is disabled by default. Syntax aaa enable no aaa enable 522 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the AAA function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa enable 46.2 tacacas-server host Description The tacacs-server host command is used to configure a new TACACS+ server. To delete the specified TACACS+ server, use no tacacs-server host command. Syntax tacacs-server host ip-address [ port port-id ] [ timeout time ] [ key { [ 0 ] string | 7 encryped-string } ] no tacacs-server host ip-address Parameter ip-address —— Specify the IP address of the TACACS+ server. port-id —— Specify the server’s port number for AAA. By default it is 49. time —— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. [ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string —— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. “string” is the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to 523 exchange messages which contains 31 characters at most. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. “encrypted-string” is a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of this command. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines The TACACS+ servers you configured are added in the server group “tacacs” by default. Example Configure a TACACS+ server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, TCP port as 1500, timeout as 6 seconds, and the unencrypted key string as 12345. T2600G-28TS(config)# tacacs-server host 1.1.1.1 port 1500 timeout 6 key 12345 46.3 show tacacs-server Description This show tacacs-server command is used to display the summary information of the TACACS+ servers. Syntax show tacacs-server Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 524 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of all the TACACS+ servers: T2600G-28TS(config)# show tacacs-server 46.4 radius-server host Description The radius-server host command is used to configure a new RADIUS server. To delete the specified RADIUS server, use no radius-server host command. Syntax radius-server host ip-address [ auth-port port-id ] [ acct-port port-id ] [ timeout time ] [ retransmit number ] [ nas-id nas-id ] [ key { [ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string } ] no radius-server host ip-address Parameter ip-address —— Specify the IP address of the RADIUS server. auth-port port-id —— Specify the UDP destination port for authentication requests. By default it is 1812. acct-port port-id —— Specify the UDP destination port for accouting requests. By deault it is 1813. time —— Specify the time in seconds the switch waits for the server’s response before it times out. The time ranges from 1 to 9 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. number —— Specify the number of times a RADIUS request is resent to a server if the server is not responding in time. By default it is 2 times. nas-id —— Specify the name of the NAS (Network Access Server) to be contained in RADIUS packets for identification. It ranges from 1 to 31 525 characters. The default value is the MAC address of the switch. Generally, the NAS indicates the switch itself. [ 0 ] string | 7 encrypted-string —— 0 and 7 are the encryption type. 0 indicates that an unencrypted key will follow. 7 indicates that a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length will follow. By default, the encryption type is 0. “string” is the shared key for the switch and the authentication servers to exchange messages which contains 31 characters at most. The question marks and spaces are not allowed. “encrypted-string” is a symmetric encrypted key with a fixed length, which you can copy from another switch’s configuration file. The key or encrypted-key you configured here will be displayed in the encrypted form. Always configure the key as the last item of this command. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines The RADIUS servers you configured are added in the server group “radius” by default. Example Configure a RADIUS server with the IP address as 1.1.1.1, authentication port as 1200, timeout as 6 seconds, retransmit times as 3, and the unencrypted key string as 12345. T2600G-28TS(config)# radius-server host 1.1.1.1 auth-port 1200 timeout 6 retransmit 3 key 12345 526 46.5 show radius-server Description This show radius-server command is used to display the summary information of the RADIUS servers. Syntax show radius-server Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of all the RADIUS servers: T2600G-28TS(config)# show radius-server 46.6 aaa group Description This aaa group command is used to create AAA server groups to group existing TACACS+/RADIUS servers for authentication. This command puts the switch in the server group subconfiguration mode. To delete the corresponding AAA group, use the no aaa group command. Syntax aaa group { radius | tacacs } group-name no aaa group { radius | tacacs } group-name Parameter radius | tacacs —— Specify the server group type as RADIUS or TACACS+. 527 group-name —— Specify the server group name. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Create a RADIUS server group with the name radius1: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa group radius radius1 46.7 server Description This server command is used to add the existing server in the defined server group. To remove the specified server from the server group, use the no server command. Syntax server ip-address no server ip-address Parameter ip-address —— Specify the server’s IP address. Command Mode Server Group Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Create the RADIUS server 1.1.1.1 to RADIUS server group “radius1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa group radius radius1 528 T2600G-28TS(aaa-group)# server 1.1.1.1 46.8 show aaa group Description This show aaa group command is used to display the summary information of the AAA groups. All the servers in this group will be listed if you specify the group name. Syntax show aaa group [ group-name ] Parameter group-name —— Specify the server group name. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of all the server groups: T2600G-28TS(config)# show aaa group 46.9 aaa authentication login Description This aaa authentication login command is used to configure a login authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to authenticate a user. To delete the specified authentication method list, use the no aaa authentication login command. 529 Syntax aaa authentication login { method-list } { method1 } [ method2 ] [ method3 ] [ method4 ] no authentication login method-list Parameter method-list —— Specify the method list name. method1, method2, method3, method4 —— Specify the authentication methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous method does not respond, not if it fails. The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none” means no authentication is used for login. Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. User Guidelines By default the login authentication method list is “default” with “local” as method1. Example Configure a login authentication method list “list1” with the priority1 method as radius and priority2 method as local: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa authenticaiton login list1 radius local 530 46.10 aaa authentication enable Description This aaa authentication enable command is used to configure a privilege authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods and their sequence to elevate a user’s privilege. To delete the specified authentication method list, use the no aaa authentication enable command. Syntax aaa authentication enable { method-list } { method1 } [ method2 ] [ method3 ] [ method4 ] no authentication enable method-list Parameter method-list —— Specify the method list name. method1, method2, method3, method4 —— Specify the authentication methods in order. The next authentication method is tried only if the previous method does not respond, not if it fails. The preset methods include radius, tacacs, local and none. “radius” means the RADIUS server group “radius”; “tacacs” means the RACACS+ server group “tacacs”; “local” means local username database are used; “none” means no authentication is used for privilege elevation. Users can aslo define new method with the aaa group command. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 531 User Guidelines By default the enable authentication method is “default” with “none” as method1. Example Configure a privilege authentication method list “list2” with the priority1 method as radius and priority2 method as local: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa authenticaiton enable list2 radius local 46.11 aaa authentication dot1x default Description This aaa authentication dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1X authentication method list. A method list describes the authentication methods for users’ login in 802.1X. To delete the default authentication method list, use the no aaa authentication dot1x default command. Syntax aaa authentication dot1x default { method } no aaa authentication dot1x default Parameter method —— Specify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is supported, and the default method is server group “radius”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the default 802.1X authentication method as “radius1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa authentication dot1x default radius1 532 46.12 aaa accounting dot1x default Description This aaa accounting dot1x default command is used to configure an 802.1X accounting method list. To delete the default accounting method list, use the no aaa accounting dot1x default command. Syntax aaa accounting dot1x default { method } no aaa accounting dot1x default Parameter method —— Sp+ecify the method name. Only RADIUS server group is supported, and the default method is server group “radius”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the default 802.1X accounting method as “radius1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default radius1 46.13 show aaa authentication Description This show aaa authentication command is used to display the summary information of the authentication login, enable and dot1x metheod list. Syntax show aaa authentication [ login | enable | dot1x ] 533 Parameter login | enable | dot1x —— Specify the method list type. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of all the authentication method lists: T2600G-28TS(config)# show aaa authentication 46.14 show aaa accounting Description This show aaa accounting command is used to display the summary information of the accounting metheod list. Syntax show aaa accounting [ dot1x ] Parameter dot1x —— Specify the method list type. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the information of the default 802.1X accounting method list: T2600G-28TS(config)# show aaa accounting 534 46.15 line console Description The line console command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode configure the console port to which you want to apply the authentication list. Syntax line console { linenum } Parameter linenum —— The number of users allowed to login through console port. Its value is 0 in general, for the reason that console input is only active on one console port at a time. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enter the Console port configuration mode and configure the console port 0: T2600G-28TS(config)#line console 0 46.16 login authentication (console) Description The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the console port. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no login authentication command. Syntax login authentication { method-list } no login authentication 535 Parameter method-list —— Specify the login method list on the console port. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “local”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the login authentication method list on the console port as “list1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1 46.17 enable authentication (console) Description The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the console port. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no enable authentication command. Syntax enable authentication { method-list } no enable authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the enable method list on the console port. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “none”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode 536 Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the enable authentication method list on the console port as “list2”: T2600G-28TS(config)# line console 0 T2600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2 46.18 line telnet Description The line telnet command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to configure the telnet terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication list. Syntax line telnet Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enter the telnet terminal line configuration mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#line telnet 537 46.19 login authentication (telnet) Description The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no login authentication command. Syntax login authentication { method-list } no login authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the login method list on the telnet terminal line. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “local”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the login authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as “list1”: T2600G-28TS(config)#line telnet T2600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1 46.20 line ssh Description The line ssh command is used to enter the Line Configuration Mode to configure the ssh terminal line to which you want to apply the authentication list. 538 Syntax line ssh Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Enter the ssh terminal line configuration mode: T2600G-28TS(config)#line ssh 46.21 login authentication (ssh) Description The login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no login authentication command. Syntax login authentication { method-list } no login authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the login method list on the ssh terminal line. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “local”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. 539 Example Configure the login authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as “list1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# line ssh T2600G-28TS(config-line)# login authentication list1 46.22 enable authentication (telnet) Description The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the telnet terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no enable authentication command. Syntax enable authentication { method-list } no enable authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the enable method list on the telnet terminal line. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “none”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the enable authentication method list on the telnet terminal line as “list2”: T2600G-28TS(config)#line telnet T2600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2 540 46.23 enable authentication (ssh) Description The enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to the ssh terminal line. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no enable authentication command. Syntax enable authentication { method-list } no enable authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the enable method list on the ssh terminal line. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “none”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the enable authentication method list on the ssh terminal line as “list2”: T2600G-28TS(config)# line ssh T2600G-28TS(config-line)# enable authentication list2 46.24 ip http login authentication Description The ip http login authentication command is used to apply the login authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to 541 the default authentication method list, use the no ip http login authentication command. Syntax ip http login authentication { method-list } no ip http login authentication Parameter method-list —— Specify the login method list on the HTTP access. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “local”. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the login authentication method list on the HTTP access as “list1”: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http login authentication list1 46.25 ip http enable authentication Description The ip http enable authentication command is used to apply the privilege authentication method list to users accessing through HTTP. To restore to the default authentication method list, use the no ip http enable authentication command. Syntax ip http enable authentication { method-list } no ip http enable authentication 542 Parameter method-list —— Specify the enable method list on the HTTP access. It is “default” by default, which contains the method “none”. Command Mode Line Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Configure the enable authentication method list on the HTTP access as “list2”: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip http enable authentication list2 46.26 show aaa global Description This show aaa global command is used to display global status of AAA function and the login/enable method lists of different application modules: console, telnet, ssh and HTTP. Syntax show aaa global Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin level users have access to these commands. Example Display the AAA function’s global status and each application’s method list: T2600G-28TS(config)# show aaa global 543 Chapter 47 DHCP Server Commands DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network configuration protocol for hosts on TCP/IP networks, and it provides a framework for distributing configuration information to hosts. DHCP server assigns IP addresses from specified address pools on a switch or router to DHCP clients and manages them. 47.1 service dhcp server Description The service dhcp server command is used to enable DHCP service globally. To disable DHCP server service, use no service dhcp server command. Syntax service dhcp server no service dhcp server Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP server service globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# service dhcp server 47.2 ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip Description The ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip command is used to configure the IP address of the remote DHCP server. To delete the remote DHCP server’s IP address, use no ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip command. 544 Syntax ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip ip-address no ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip Parameter ip-address —— Specify the IP address of the remote server. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the remote DHCP server’s IP address as 192.168.3.1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option capwap-ac-ip 192.168.3.1 47.3 ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id Description The ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id command is used to configure the class ID of the packets from DHCP server in a different network segment. To delete the class ID settings, use no ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id command. Syntax ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id class-id no ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id Parameter class-id —— Specify the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network segment. 545 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the class ID of the DHCP packets from another network segment as 34: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server extend-option vendor-class-id 34 47.4 ip dhcp server exclude-address Description The ip dhcp server exclude-address command is used to specify the reserved IP addresses which are forbidden to allocate, such as the gateway address, the network segment broadcast address, the server address etc. To delete the reserved IP addresses, use no ip dhcp server exclude-address command. Syntax ip dhcp server exclude-address start-ip-address end-ip-address no ip dhcp server exclude-address start-ip-addr end-ip-address Parameter start-ip-address —— Specify the start IP address of the reserved IP pool. end-ip-address —— Specify the end IP address of the reserved IP pool. Only one IP address will be reserved if the end IP address and the start IP address are the same. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 546 Example Set the reserved IP addresses from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.9: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server exclude-address 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.9 47.5 ip dhcp server pool Description The ip dhcp server pool command is used to create the address pool of DHCP Server and enter the dhcp configuration mode. To delete the address pool, use no ip dhcp server pool command. Syntax ip dhcp server pool pool-name no ip dhcp server pool pool-name Parameter pool-name —— Specify the address pool name, ranging from 1 to 8 characters. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Create the address pool of name POOL1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool POOL1 547 47.6 ip dhcp server ping timeout Description The ip dhcp server ping timeout command is used to specify the timeout of PING process. To resume the default value, use no ip dhcp server ping timeout command. Syntax ip dhcp server ping timeout value no ip dhcp server ping timeout Parameter value —— Specify the timeout value, ranging from 100 to 10000ms. The default value is 100ms. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Set the timeout of PING as 200ms: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server ping timeout 200 47.7 ip dhcp server ping packets Description The ip dhcp server ping packets command is used to specify the number of PING packets sent. If this value is set to 0, the PING process will be disabled. To resume the default value, use no ip dhcp server ping packets command. Syntax ip dhcp server ping packets num 548 Parameter num —— Specify the PING packets’ number, ranging from 0 to 10. By default it’s 1. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the PING packets’ number as 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server ping packets 2 47.8 network Description The network command is used to specify the address and subnet of the network pool. Syntax network network-address subnet-mask Parameter network-address —— Specify the network address of the pool, with the format A.B.C.D. All the IP addresses in the same subnet are allocatable except the reserved addresses and specific addresses. subnet-mask —— Specify the subnet mask of the pool, with the format A.B.C.D. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 549 Example Specify the address pool “product” as 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# network 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 47.9 lease Description The lease command is used to specify the lease time of the address pool. Syntax lease lease-time Parameter lease-time —— Specify the lease time of the pool, ranging from 1 to 2880 minutes. The default value is 120 minutes. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the lease time of address pool “product” as 10 minutes: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# lease 10 47.10 address hardware-address Description The address hardware-address command is used to reserve the static address bound with hardware address in the address pool. To delete the binding, use no address hardware-address. 550 Syntax address ip-address hardware-address hardware-address hardware-type { ethernet | ieee802 } no address ip-address Parameter ip-address —— Specify the static binding IP address. hardware-address —— Specify the hardware address, in the format XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX. ethernet | ieee802 —— Specify the hardware type. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool “product” for the device with the MAC address as 5e:4c:a6:31:24:01 and the hardware type as ethernet: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# address 192.168.0.10 hardware-address 5e:4c:a6:31:24:01 hardware-type ethernet 47.11 address client-identifier Description The address client-identifier command is used to specify the static address bound with client ID in the address pool. To delete the binding, use no address command. Syntax address ip-address client-identifier client-id [ascii] 551 no address ip-address Parameter ip-address —— Specify the static binding IP address. client-id —— Specify the client ID, in the format of hex value. ascii —— The client ID is entered with ascii characters. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Reserve the IP address 192.168.0.10 in the address pool “product” for the device with the client ID as abc in ascii: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp pool product T2600G-28TS(dhcp-config)# address 192.168.0.10 client-identifier abc ascii 47.12 default-gateway Description The default-gateway command is used to specify the default gateway of the address pool. To delete the configuration, use no default-gateway. Syntax default-gateway gateway-list no default-gateway Parameter gateway-list —— Specify the gateway list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 gateways can be configured, separated by comma. 552 Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the address pool product’s default gateways as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(dhcp-config)# default-gateway 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1 47.13 dns-server Description The dns-server command is used to specify the DNS server of the address pool. To delete this configuration, use no dns-server command. Syntax dns-server dns-list no dns-server Parameter dns-list —— Specify the DNS server list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 DNS servers can be configured, separated by comma. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the address pool’s DNS servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1: 553 T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# dns-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1 47.14 netbios-name-server Description The netbios-name-server command is used to specify the Netbios server’s IP address. To delete the Netbios servers, use no netbios-name-server command. Syntax netbios-name-server NBNS-list no netbios-name-server Parameter NBNS-list —— Specify the Netbios server list, with the format of A.B.C.D,E.F.G.H. At most 8 Netbios servers can be configured, separated by comma. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the address pool’s Netbios servers as 192.168.0.1 and 192.168.1.1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# netbios-name-server 192.168.0.1,192.168.1.1 554 47.15 netbios-node-type Description The netbios-node-type command is used to specify the Netbios server’s node type. To delete the node type setttings, use no netbios-node-type command. Syntax netbios-node-type type no netbios-node-type Parameter type —— Specify the node type as b-node, h-node, m-node or p-node. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the address pool’s Netbios server type as b-node: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# netbios-node-type b-node 47.16 next-server Description The next-server command is used to specify the next DHCP server’s address during the DHCP boot process. To delete the next server, use no next-server command. Syntax next-server ip-address 555 next-server Parameter ip-address —— Specify the IP address of the next server. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the next server’s IP address as 192.168.2.1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# next-server 192.168.2.1 47.17 domain-name Description The domain-name command is used to specify the domain name for the DHCP client. To delete the domain name, use no domain-name command. Syntax domain-name domainname no domain-name Parameter domainname —— Specify the domain name for the DHCP client. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 556 Example Specify the DHCP client’s domain name as edu: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# domain-name edu 47.18 bootfile Description The bootfilecommand is used to specify the name of the DHCP client’s bootfile. To delete the bootfile, use no bootfile command. Syntax bootfile file-name no bootfile Parameter file-name —— Specify the name of the DHCP client’s bootfile. Command Mode DHCP Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the name of the DHCP client’s bootfile as boot1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp server pool product T2600G-28TS(config-dhcp)# bootfile boot1 557 47.19 show ip dhcp server status Description The show ip dhcp server status command is used to display the status of the DHCP service. Syntax show ip dhcp server status Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the status of DHCP service: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server status 47.20 show ip dhcp server statistics Description The show ip dhcp server statistics command is used to display the DHCP packets received and sent by DHCP server. Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the statistics of DHCP packets received and sent by the DHCP server: 558 T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server statistics 47.21 show ip dhcp server extend-option Description The show ip dhcp server extend-option command is used to display the configuration of the remote DCHP servers. Syntax show ip dhcp server extend-option Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configurations of the remote DCHP servers: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server extend-option 47.22 show ip dhcp server pool Description The show ip dhcp server pool command is used to display the configuration of the address pool. Syntax show ip dhcp server pool Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 559 Example Display the configured address pool: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server pool 47.23 show ip dhcp server excluded-address Description The show ip dhcp server excluded-address command is used to display the configuration of reserved addresses. Syntax show ip dhcp server excluded-address Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configured reserved addresses: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server excluded-address 47.24 show ip dhcp server manual-binding Description The show ip dhcp server manual-binding command is used to display the configuration of static binding address. Syntax show ip dhcp server manual-binding Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 560 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configured static binding address: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server manual-binding 47.25 show ip dhcp server binding Description The show ip dhcp server binding command is used to display the binding entries. Syntax show ip dhcp server binding [ ip ip-address ] Parameter ip-address —— Specify the binding IP address. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the address binding entries: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp server binding 47.26 clear ip dhcp server statistics Description The clear ip dhcp server statistics command is used to clear the statistics information of DHCP packets. 561 Syntax clear ip dhcp server statistics Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear the packet statistics: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ip dhcp server statistics 47.27 clear ip dhcp server binding Description The clear ip dhcp server binding command is used to clear the binding information. Syntax clear ip dhcp server binding [ ip-address ] Parameter ip-address —— Specify the binding IP address. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Clear all the binding addresses: T2600G-28TS(config)# clear ip dhcp server binding 562 Chapter 48 DHCP Server Filter Commands Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support DHCP Server Filter. 48.1 ip dhcp filter (global) Description The ip dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Server Filter function globally. To disable the DHCP Server Filter function globally, use no ip dhcp filter command. Syntax ip dhcp filter no ip dhcp filter Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP Server Filter function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp filter 48.2 ip dhcp filter (interface) Description The ip dhcp filter command is used to enable DHCP Server Filter function for a specified interface. To disable the DHCP Server Filter function for a specified interface, use no ip dhcp filter command. 563 Syntax ip dhcp filter no ip dhcp filter Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP Server Filter function on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp filter 48.3 ip dhcp filter server permit-entry Description The ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to add a dhcp server permit entry. To delete a DHCP server permit entry, use no ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command. Syntax ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr client-mac macAddr interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } no ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip ipAddr client-mac macAddr interface { gigabitEthernet port-list | port-channel port-channel-id } Parameter ipAddr —— DHCP Server IP address. macAddr ——DHCP Client MAC address, the value “all” specify all client mac address. port-list —— The list of Ethernet ports. 564 port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channels Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add a dhcp server permit entry. In this entry, the server IP is 192.168.1.1, the client –mac is aa:aa:aa:aa:aa:aa, and the port is 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp filter server permit-entry server-ip 192.168.1.1 client-mac aa:aa:aa:aa:aa:aa interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 48.4 show ip dhcp filter Description The show ip dhcp filter command is used to display the DHCP Filter global configuration. Syntax show ip dhcp filter Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DHCP Filter global configuration: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp filter 565 48.5 show ip dhcp filter interface Description The show ip dhcp filter interface command is used to display the DHCP Filter configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. Syntax show ip dhcp filter interface [ gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the ip dhcp filter configuration on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 48.6 show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry Description The show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry command is used to display the DHCP Filter Server permit entries configuration. Syntax show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry 566 Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the DHCP Filter server permit entries configuration: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp filter server permit-entry 567 Chapter 49 DHCP Relay Commands A DHCP Relay is a Layer 3 device that forwards DHCP packets between clients and servers. DHCP Relay forward requests and replies between clients and servers when they are not on the same physical subnet. 49.1 service dhcp relay Description The service dhcp relay command is used to enable DHCP Relay function globally. To disable DHCP Relay function, use no service dhcp relay command. Syntax service dhcp relay no service dhcp relay Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP Relay function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# service dhcp relay 49.2 ip dhcp relay enable Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. 568 Description The ip dhcp relay enable command is used to enable DHCP Relay fuction on specified interface. To disable DHCP Relay function on specified intrerface, use no ip dhcp relay enable command. Syntax ip dhcp relay enable no ip dhcp relay enable Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable dhcp relay function on port 1/0/1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay enable 49.3 ip helper-address Description The ip helper-address command is used to add DHCP Server address to the Layer 3 interface. To delete the server address, use no ip helper-address command. Syntax ip helper-address ip-address no ip helper-address [ ip-address ] Parameter ip-address —— DHCP Server address. 569 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add DHCP Server address 192.168.2.1 to interface VLAN 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip helper-address 192.168.2.1 49.4 ip dhcp relay information Description The ip dhcp relay information command is used to enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay. To disable this function, use no ip dhcp relay information command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information no ip dhcp relay information Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable option 82 support in DHCP Relay: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay information 570 49.5 ip dhcp relay information policy Description The ip dhcp relay information policy command is used to specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp relay information policy command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information policy { drop | keep | replace } no ip dhcp relay information policy Parameter drop | keep | replace ——The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep. drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field. keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet. replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the switch. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the option 82 policy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay information policy replace 571 49.6 ip dhcp relay information format Description The ip dhcp relay information format command is used to select the format of option 82 sub-option value field. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp relay information format command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information format { normal | private } no ip dhcp relay information format Parameter normal | private —— The format type of option 82 sub-option value field. normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV (type-length-value). private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you configure for the related sub-option. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV (type-length-value): T2600G-28TS(config)#ip dhcp relay information format normal 572 49.7 ip dhcp relay information custom Description The ip dhcp relay information custom command is used to enable the switch to customize the option 82 field. To disable this function, use no ip dhcp relay information custom command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information custom no ip dhcp relay information custom Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable the switch to customize the option 82 field: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay information custom 49.8 ip dhcp relay information circuit-id Description The ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the custom circuit ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the circuit ID, use no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information circuit-id circuitID no ip dhcp relay information circuit-id Parameter circuitID —— Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters. 573 Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the circuit ID as “TP-Link”: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay information circuit-id TP-Link 49.9 ip dhcp relay information remote-id Description The ip dhcp relay information remote-id command is used to specify the custom remote ID when option 82 customization is enabled. To clear the remote ID, use no ip dhcp relay information remote-id command. Syntax ip dhcp relay information remote-id remoteID no ip dhcp relay information remote-id Parameter remoteID —— Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the remote ID as “TP-Link”: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay information remote-id TP-Link 574 49.10 ip dhcp relay default-interface Description The ip dhcp relay default-interface command is used to configure default relay agent interface. When the switch works at DHCP VLAN Relay mode and there is no IP interface in the VLAN, the switch uses the IP of default relay agent interface to fill in the relay agent IP address field of DHCP packets. To delete the default relay agent interface use no ip dhcp relay default-interface. Syntax ip dhcp relay default-interface no ip dhcp relay default-interface Command mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Configure interface VLAN 1 as the default relay agent interface: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface vlan 1 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp relay default-interface 49.11 ip dhcp relay vlan Description The ip dhcp relay vlan command is used to add DHCP server address to specified VLAN. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a DHCP server address at the interface level, then the configuration at the interface level has higher priority. In this case, the DHCP server configured on the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets. To delete the DHCP server address use no ip dhcp relay vlan. 575 Syntax ip dhcp relay vlan vid helper-address ip-address no ip dhcp relay vlan vid helper-address [ ip-address ] Parameter vid —— VLAN ID. ip-address —— DHCP Server address. Command mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Add DHCP server address 192.168.2.1 to VLAN 1: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp relay vlan 1 helper-address 192.168.2.1 49.12 show ip dhcp relay Description The show ip dhcp relay command is used to display the global status and Option 82 configuration of DHCP Relay. Syntax show ip dhcp relay Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of DHCP Relay: 576 T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp relay 49.13 show ip dhcp relay interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. Description The show ip dhcp relay interface command is used to display the DHCP Relay configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. Syntax show ip dhcp relay interface [gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id ——The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of DHCP Relay on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp relay interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 577 Chapter 50 DHCP L2 Relay Commands Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support DHCP L2 Relay. 50.1 ip dhcp l2relay Description The ip dhcp l2relay command is used to enable DHCP L2 Relay function globally. To disable DHCP L2 Relay function, use no ip dhcp l2relay command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay no ip dhcp l2relay Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP L2 Relay function globally: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp l2relay 50.2 ip dhcp l2relay vlan Description The ip dhcp l2relay vlan command is used to enable DHCP L2 relay in the specified VLAN. To disable DHCP L2 Relay in the specific vlan, use no ip dhcp l2relay vlan command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range no ip dhcp l2relay vlan vlan-range 578 Parameter vlan-range —— Specify the vlan to be enabled with DHCP L2 relay. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable DHCP L2 Relay for VLAN 2: T2600G-28TS(config)# ip dhcp l2relay vlan 2 50.3 ip dhcp l2relay information option Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To enable the option 82 function on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS, refer to 15.4 ip dhcp snooping information option. Description The ip dhcp l2relay information option command is used to enable the option 82 function in DHCP l2relay on a specified port/port channel. To disable this function, use no ip dhcp l2relay information option command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay information option no ip dhcp l2relay information option Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable option 82 support in DHCP l2relay for port 1/0/2: 579 T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information option 50.4 ip dhcp l2relay information strategy Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the host on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS, refer to 15.5 ip dhcp snooping information strategy. Description The ip dhcp l2relay information strategy command is used to specify the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the host on a specified port/port channel. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp l2relay information strategy command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay information strategy { drop | keep | replace } no ip dhcp l2relay information strategy Parameter drop | keep | replace ——The operations for Option 82 field of the DHCP request packets from the Host. The default operation is keep. drop: Discard the packet with the Option 82 field. keep: Keep the Option 82 field in the packet. replace: Replace the option 82 field with the system option defined by the switch. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 580 Example Specify the option 82 strategy as replace to replace the Option 82 field with the local parameter on receiving the DHCP request packet for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information strategy replace 50.5 ip dhcp l2relay information format Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To select the format of option 82 sub-option value field on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS, refer to 15.6 ip dhcp snooping information format. Description The ip dhcp l2relay information format command is used to select the format of option 82 sub-option value field on a specified port/port channel. To restore to the default option, use no ip dhcp l2relay information format command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay information format { normal | private } no ip dhcp l2relay information format Parameter normal | private —— The format type of option 82 sub-option value field. normal: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is TLV (type-length-value). private: Indicates that the format of sub-option value field is the value you configure for the related sub-option. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. 581 Example Select the format of option 82 sub-option value field as TLV (type-length-value) for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)#ip dhcp l2relay information format normal 50.6 ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To specify the customized Circuit ID for the Option 82 on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS, refer to 15.7 ip dhcp snooping information circuit-id. Description The ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command is used to specify the customized Circuit ID for the Option 82 on a specified port/port channel. To clear the Circuit ID, use no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id circuitID no ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id Parameter circuitID —— Specify the circuit ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the circuit ID as “TP-Link” for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information circuit-id TP-Link 582 50.7 ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To specify the customized Remote ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel for T2600G-18TS and T2600G-52TS, refer to 15.8 ip dhcp snooping information remote-id. Description The ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command is used to specify the customized Remote ID for Option 82 on a specified port/port channel. To clear the Remote ID, use no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id command. Syntax ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id remoteID no ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id Parameter remoteID —— Specify the remote ID, ranging from 1 to 64 characters. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Specify the remote ID as “TP-Link” for port 2: T2600G-28TS(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# ip dhcp l2relay information remote-id TP-Link 50.8 show ip dhcp l2relay Description The show ip dhcp l2relay command is used to display the global status of DHCP l2relay. 583 Syntax show ip dhcp l2relay Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of DHCP l2relay:e T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay 50.9 show ip dhcp l2relay interface Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support this command. To display the DHCP snooping option 82 configuration of a desired port/port channel or of all ports/port channels, refer to 15.17 show ip dhcp snooping information interface. Description The show ip dhcp l2relay interface command is used to display the DHCP l2relay configuration of a desired port/port channel or of all ports/port channels. Syntax show ip dhcp l2relay interface [gigabitEthernet port | port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id ——The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. 584 Example Display the configuration of DHCP l2Relay on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show ip dhcp l2relay interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 585 Chapter 51 NetBIOS Filter Commands Note: Only T2600G-28TS and T2600G-28MPS support NetBIOS Filter. 51.1 netbios filter Description The netbios filter command is used to enable netbios filter function on the specified interface. To disable netbios filter function on the specified interface, use no netbios filter command. Syntax netbios filter no netbios filter Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet / interface port-channel / interface range port-channel) Privilege Requirement Only Admin, Operator and Power User level users have access to these commands. Example Enable netbios filter function on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28TS(config-if)# netbios filter 586 51.2 show netbios filter Description The show netbios filter command is used to display the NetBIOS Filter configuration of a desired Gigabit Ethernet port/port channel or of all Ethernet ports/port channels. Syntax show netbios filter [interface gigabitEthernet port | interface port-channel port-channel-id ] Parameters port —— The Ethernet port number. port-channel-id —— The ID of the port channel. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the NetBIOS Filter configuration on port 1/0/2: T2600G-28TS(config)# show netbios filter interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 587 Chapter 52 PoE Commands Note: Only T2600G-28MPS supports PoE. PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is especially useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras and so on. 52.1 power inline consumption (global) Description The power inline consumption command is used to configure the max power the PoE switch can supply globally. Syntax power inline consumption power-limit Parameter power-limit ——The max power the PoE switch can supply, ranging from 1 to 384w. By default, the value is 384. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Configure the max power the PoE switch can supply as 160w: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power inline consumption 160 588 52.2 power inline disconnect-method Description The power inline disconnect-method command is used to offset the power limit being exceeded and keep the switch system using power at a usable level. Syntax power inline disconnect-method {deny-next-port|deny-low-priority} Parameter deny-next-port —— When the supply power exceeds the power limit, the PD linked to the next port will be disconnected. deny-low priority —— When the supply power exceeds the power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Configure the power disconnect method as deny-next-port: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power inline disconnect-method deny-next-port 52.3 power profile Description The power profile command is used to create a PoE profile for the switch. To delete the configured PoE profile configuration, use no power profile command. PoE Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. In a PoE profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and power limit are configured. You can specify a PoE profile for each PoE port individually. 589 Syntax power profile name [supply {enable | disable} [priority {low | middle | high} [consumption { power-limit | auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 } ] ] ] no power profile name Parameter name —— The PoE profile name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. If the name being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes. supply —— The PoE status of the port in the profile. By default, the PoE status is “enable”. priority —— The PoE priority of the port in the profile. The priority levels include “high”, “middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected. By default, the PoE priority is “low”. consumption —— The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”. “Power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300. The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “Auto” indicates the value is assigned automatically by the PoE switch. “Class1” represents 4w. “Class2” represents 7w. “Class3” represents 15.4w. “Class4” represents 30w. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Create a PoE profile named “IP Camera” whose PoE status is “enable”, PoE priority is “low” and the power limit is “5w”: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power profile priority low consumption 50 590 “IP Camera” supply enable 52.4 power time-range Description The power time-range command is used to create PoE time-range for the switch and enter Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode. After a PoE time-range is created, you need to specify the date and time which has three mode options available: absolute, periodic and holiday. A PoE time-range can implement multiple time-ranges simultaneously as long as they do not conflict with each other. To delete the corresponding PoE time-range configuration, use no power time-range command. The PoE time-range determines the power supply time of the switch. You can specify a PoE time-range for each PoE port individually. Syntax power time-range name no power time-range name Parameter name —— The PoE time-range name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Create a PoE time-range named “tRange1” for the switch: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power time-range tRange1 591 52.5 power holiday Description The power holiday command is used to create PoE holiday for the switch. To delete the corresponding PoE holiday configuration, use no power holiday command. Syntax power holiday name start-date start-date end-date end-date no power holiday name Parameter name —— The PoE holiday name, ranging from 1 to 16 characters. start-date —— The start date of the PoE holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/01. end-date ——The end date of the PoE holiday, in the format of MM/DD, for instance, 05/01. Command Mode Global Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Create a PoE holiday named “National Day”, and configure the start date as October 1st and the end date as October 3rd: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power holiday NationalDay start-date 10/01 end-date 10/03 592 52.6 absolute Description The absolute command is used to create an absolute mode time-range for the PoE time-range of the switch. The switch will supply power when the specified absolute time occurs. To delete the corresponding absolute mode time-range configuration, use no absolute command. Syntax absolute start start-date end end-date no absolute Parameter start-date —— The start date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY. end-date —— The end date in Absoluteness Mode, in the format of MM/DD/YYYY. Command Mode Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Create an absolute mode time-range for the PoE of the switch and specify the date extending from May 5, 2012 through Oct. 5, 2012: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power time-range tRange1 T2600G-28MPS(config-pwr-time-range)# absolute start 05/05/2012 end 10/05/2012 593 52.7 periodic Description The periodic command is used to create a periodic mode time-range for the PoE time-range of the switch. The switch will supply power when the specified periodic time occurs. To delete the corresponding periodic mode time-range configuration, use no periodic command. Syntax periodic { [ week-date week-day ] [ time-slice1 time-slice ] [ time-slice2 time-slice ] [ time-slice3 time-slice ] [ time-slice4 time-slice ] } no periodic [ week-date | time-slice ] Parameter week-day —— Periodic Mode, with “1-7”, “daily”, “off-day” and “working-day” options. “1-7” should be entered in the format of 1-3, 7 which represent Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Sunday. “Daily” represents every day. “Off-day” represents weekend. “Working-day” represents working day. time-slice —— Create time-slice, in the format of HH:MM-HH:MM. Command Mode Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Configure the PoE time-range named “tRange2” as a periodic time-range and specify the date and time as 8:30 to 12:00 on weekends: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power time-range tRange2 T2600G-28MPS(config-pwr-time-range)# periodic week-date off-day time-slice1 08:30-12:00 594 52.8 holiday Description The holiday command is used to create holiday mode time-range for the PoE time-range of the switch. When the PoE holiday which is excluded from PoE time-range occurs, the switch will not supply power. Syntax holiday { exclude | include } Parameter exclude —— Indicates the PoE time-range of the switch excluding the PoE holiday. When PoE holiday occurs, the switch will not supply power. include —— Indicates the PoE time-range of the switch including the PoE holiday. It is the default option. When PoE holiday occurs, the switch will supply power. Command Mode Power Time-range Create Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Create a holiday mode time-range for the PoE time-range named “tRange3” and configure PoE time-range of the switch excludes the PoE holiday: T2600G-28MPS(config)# power time-range tRange3 T2600G-28MPS(config-pwr-time-range)# holiday exclude 52.9 power inline consumption (interface) Description The power inline consumption command is used to configure the power limit 595 the corresponding port can supply. Syntax power inline consumption { power-limit | auto | class1 | class2 | class3 | class4 } Parameter power-limit —— The max power the port in the profile can supply, with five options: “power-limit”, “auto”, ”class1”, “class2”, “class3” and “class4”. “Power-limit” indicates you can manually enter a value ranging from 1 to 300. The value is in the unit of 0.1 watt. For instance, if you want to configure the max power as 5w, you should enter 50. “Auto” indicates the value is assigned automatically by the PoE switch. “Class1” represents 4w. “Class2” represents 7w. “Class3” represents 15.4w. “Class4” represents 30w. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement None. Example Configure the power limit as “5w” for port 2: T2600G-28MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28MPS(config-if)# power inline consumption 50 52.10 power inline priority Description The power inline priority command is used to configure the PoE priority for the corresponding port Syntax 596 power inline priority { low | middle | high } Parameter priority —— The PoE priority of the port. The priority levels include “high”, “middle” and “low” in descending order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected. By default, the priority level is “low”. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement None. Example Configure the PoE priority as “low” for port 2: T2600G-28MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28MPS(config-if)# power inline priority low 52.11 power inline supply Description The power inline supply command is used to configure the PoE status of the corresponding port. Syntax power inline supply { enable | disable } Parameter enable | disable —— The PoE status of the port. By default, the PoE status is “enable”. 597 Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement None. Example Enable the PoE feature for port 2: T2600G-28MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28MPS(config-if)# power inline supply enable 52.12 power inline profile Description The power inline profile command is used to bind a PoE profile to the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, use no power inline profile command. Syntax power inline profile name no power inline profile Parameter name —— The name of the PoE profile to be bound to the port. If the name being assigned contains spaces then put it inside double quotes. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode (interface gigabitEthernet / interface range gigabitEthernet) Privilege Requirement None. 598 Example Bind the PoE profile named “IP Camera” to port 2: T2600G-28MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28MPS(config-if)# power inline profile “IP Camera” 52.13 power inline time-range Description The power inline time-range command is used to bind a PoE time-range to the corresponding port. To cancel the bind relation, use no power inline time-range command. Syntax power inline time-range name no power inline time-range Parameter name —— The name of the PoE time-range to be bound to the port. Command Mode Interface Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Bind the PoE time-range named “tRange2" to port 2: T2600G-28MPS(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/0/2 T2600G-28MPS(config-if)# power inline time-range tRange2 599 52.14 show power inline Description The show power inline command is used to display the global PoE information of the system. Syntax show power inline Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the PoE information of the system: T2600G-28MPS# show power inline 52.15 show power inline configuration interface Description The show power inline configuration interface command is used to display the PoE configuration of the certain port. Syntax show power inline configuration interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode 600 Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the PoE configuration of all ports: T2600G-28MPS# show power inline configuration interface 52.16 show power inline information interface Description The show power inline information command is used to display the PoE information of the certain port. Syntax show power inline information interface [ gigabitEthernet port ] Parameter port —— The Ethernet port number. Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the PoE information of all ports: T2600G-28MPS# show power inline information interface 52.17 show power profile Description The show power profile command is used to display the defined PoE profile. 601 Syntax show power profile Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the defined PoE profile: T2600G-28MPS# show power profile 52.18 show power holiday Description The show power holiday command is used to display the defined PoE holiday. Syntax show power holiday Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the defined PoE holiday: T2600G-28MPS# show power holiday 602 52.19 show power time-range Description The show power time-range command is used to display the configuration of PoE time-range. Syntax show power time-range Command Mode Privileged EXEC Mode and Any Configuration Mode Privilege Requirement None. Example Display the configuration of PoE time-range: T2600G-28MPS# show power time-range 603
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : No Tagged PDF : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Modify Date : 2018:03:12 17:36:40+08:00 Create Date : 2018:03:12 17:32:34+08:00 Metadata Date : 2018:03:12 17:36:40+08:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 11 for Word Document ID : uuid:1dbd8e12-99f9-4dc3-8ab9-41269bd2d95e Instance ID : uuid:e913ba43-5465-475c-aff6-ee6f6bd454ec Subject : 72 Format : application/pdf Title : Description : Creator : Producer : Adobe PDF Library 11.0 Source Modified : D:20180312093136 Company : Comments : Page Layout : OneColumn Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 626 Warning : [Minor] Ignored duplicate Info dictionaryEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools